FIR Selection Guide Melexis

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 355

BS-300

Chemistry Analyzer

Operation Manual
© 2005-2006 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights
Reserved.

For this Operation Manual, the issued Date is 2006-03 (Version: 1.3).

Intellectual Property Statement


SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this
manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and
does not convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of
others. Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of
patents or other rights of third parties.

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.


Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this


manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is
strictly forbidden.

, , , , are the registered


trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries. All
other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes
without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party


Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not
be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in
the condition that:

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of


this product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

I
WARNING:
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this
equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan.
Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human
health.

NOTE:
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained
and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.

Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions

Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the
use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than
Mindray authorized personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or


accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.

Return Policy

Return Procedure

In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to
Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:

1 Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and


obtain a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray
number must appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned
shipments will not be accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible.
Please provide the model number, serial number, and a brief description
of the reason for return.
2 Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this
product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
3 Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address
offered by Customer Service department.

II
Company Contact

Manufacture: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.


Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial
Park, Nanshan, Shenzhen, P.R.China, 518057
Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582500 26582501

III
Preface

Who Should Read This Manual


This manual is written for clinical laboratory professionals to:

learn about the BS-300 hardware and software


set up and operate the BS-300
maintain and troubleshoot the BS-300

WARNING:
The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer is to be operated only by medical
professionals trained and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized
distributors.

What Can You Find in This Manual


The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer should be operated and serviced strictly as
instructed by this manual.

This manual contains 7 chapters, plus 3 appendixes:

1 System Description
2 Installation
3 Basic Operations
4 Advanced Operations
5 Maintenance
6 Troubleshooting
7 Calculation Methods
AppendixA Specifications
AppendixB Supplies
AppendixC Index

Conventions Used in This Manual


This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meanings in the text.

All capital, italic font indicates a key name, such as ENTER.

Bold font indicates a chapter title, such as 4 Maintenance

1
Preface

Bold and Italic font indicates:

Screen text displayed by the analyzer, such as Can’t save.


A menu name, such as Setup.
A screen field or value, such as Method.

Safety Symbols

This chart explains the symbols used in this manual.

When you see … Then …


Read the statement following the symbol. The
WARNING: statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.

Read the statement following the symbol. The


BIOHAZARD: statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.

Read the statement following the symbol. The


CAUTION: statement is alerting you to a possibility of system
damage or unreliable results.

Read the statement following the symbol. The


NOTE: statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.

Labels Used on the System

The labels attached to some BS-300 panels use symbols with the text to clarify the
meaning of the text. The table below explains the symbols on the labels.

Serial Number

Manufacturer

Date of Manufacture

Authorized Representative in the European Community

The device is fully in conformance with the Council Directive


Concerning In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices 98/79/EC.

2
Preface

The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU


member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that
this product should not be treated as household waste.
By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent bringing potential negative consequences to the
environment and human health. For more detailed
information with regard to returning and recycling this
product, please consult the distributor from whom you
purchased the product.

In Vitro Diagnostic equipment

Biohazard Warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection

Warning: risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Warning: risk of electric shock

Warning: risk of burn

ON (POWER)

OFF (POWER)

ON (ANALYZING UNIT POWER)

OFF (ANALYZING UNIT POWER)

~ Alternating current (AC)

Graphics

All graphics, including screens and printout, are for illustration purposes only and
must not be used for any other purpose.

EC Representative

Name: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)


Address: Eiffestrasse 80 D-20537 Hamburg Germany
Phone: +49 40 2513174
Fax: +49 40 255726

3
Preface

Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when using the BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer.
Ignoring any of these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment
damage.

WARNING:
If the system is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer,
the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Preventing Electric Shocks

WARNING:
When the POWER is on, users must not open the rear or side cover.
Liquid ingression may lead to electric shock or equipment damage. In
case of liquid ingression, shut off the power supplies and contact
Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

WARNING:
Do not touch such moving parts as sample probe, reagent probe and
mixing bar, when the BS-300 is in operation.
Do not put your finger or hand into any open part when the BS-300 is
in operation.

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

WARNING:
Light sent by the photometer lamp may hurt your eyes. Do not stare
into the lamp when the BS-300 is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the POWER
and then wait at least 30 minutes for the lamp to cool down before
touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you may get
burned.

4
Preface

Preventing Infection

BIOHAZARD:
Inappropriately handling samples may lead to biohazardous infection.
Do not touch the sample, mixture or waste with your hands. Wear
gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, follow standard laboratory
safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Certain reagents are strong acid or alkaline. Exercise caution when
using the reagents. In case your skin or clothes contacts the reagents,
wash them off with soap and clean water. In case the reagents spill
into your eyes, wash them off with much water and consult an eye
doctor.

Treating Waste

BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer
or distributor of the reagents for details.

Preventing Fire or Explosion

WARNING:
Do not use flammable substance around the BS-300.

5
Preface

Precautions on Use
To use the BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer safely and effectively, pay attention to the
following operation notes.

Intended Use

WARNING:
The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer (hereinafter referred to as the
BS-300) is a chemistry system that is designed for the in vitro
quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma,
urine or CSF samples. Please consult Mindray first if you want to use
the BS-300 for other purposes.
To draw a clinical conclusion, please also refer to the patient’s clinical
symptom and other test results.
Contraindications: none.

Operator

WARNING:
The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer is to be operated only by personnel
trained and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.

Environment

CAUTION:
Please install and operate the BS-300 in an environment specified by
this manual. Installing and operating the BS-300 in other environment
may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
To relocate the BS-300, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

Preventing Interference by Electromagnetic Noise

CAUTION:
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operation of the BS-300. Do
not install devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around
the BS-300. Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio
transmitters in the room housing the BS-300. Do not use other CRT
displays around the BS-300.
Do not use other medical instruments around the BS-300 that may
generate electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.

6
Preface

Operating the BS-300

CAUTION:
Operate the BS-300 strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
use of the BS-300 may lead to unreliable test results or even
equipment damage or personal injury.
Before using the system for the first time, run the calibration program
and the QC program to make sure it is in a proper state.
Be sure to run the QC program every time you use the system,
otherwise the result man be unreliable.
Do not open the sample disk or reagent disk cover when the BS-300 is
operating.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is to be used for connection
with the operation unit only. Do not use it for other purposes. Only use
the supplied cable for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the BS-300 control
system installed. Installing other software or hardware on this
computer may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other
software when the system is working.
Do not use this computer for other purposes. Inappropriate use of this
computer may introduce computer virus, which may spread through
floppy disks, software or network, into the system.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals on them.
Don’t place the POWER to ON again within 10 seconds since placing
it to OFF, otherwise the system may enter the protection status. If it
does so, place the POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.

Maintaining the BS-300

CAUTION:
Maintain the BS-300 strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to equipment damage or personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the BS-300 surface, use a soft, clean and wet
(not too wet) cloth, soaked with soap water if necessary, to clean the
surface. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol for the cleaning.
After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before
cleaning. Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression into
the system, otherwise it may lead to equipment damage or personal
injury.
Replacements of such major parts as the photometer, sample probe,
reagent probe, mixing bar and syringe plungers must be followed by a
calibration.

7
Preface

Samples

CAUTION:
Use serum samples that are completely separated from blood clots or
urine samples that are free from suspended matter. If fibrin exists in
the serum samples or suspended matter exist in the urine samples,
the sample probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to
unreliable test results.
Hemolysis, jaundice or chylomicron in the samples may lead to
unreliable test results, so sample blanks are recommended

Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the


compositions of the samples and lead to unreliable results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the
sample open for too long.
Not all the tests the reagents claim capable of analyzing can be
analyzed on the BS-300. Consult the reagent suppliers for detailed
information
Certain samples need to be processed before being analyzed by the
BS-300. Consult the reagent suppliers for details.
The BS-300 has a specific requirement on the minimum sample
volume. Refer to this manual for the proper sample volume.
Load the sample to proper tube positions on the sample disk before
the analysis begins; otherwise you will not obtain correct results.

Reagents, Calibrators and Controls

CAUTION:
Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls in the BS-300.
Select appropriate reagents according to the performance
characteristics of the BS-300. Consult the reagent supplier or
Mindray-authorized distributor for details when you are not sure about
your reagent choice.

Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as


instructed by the suppliers. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable
results or the best performance of the BS-300.
Perform calibration after changing the reagents. Otherwise, you may
not obtain reliable results.
Contamination among reagents by carryover may lead to unreliable
test results. Consult the reagent supplier for details.

8
Preface

Setting up BS-300

CAUTION:
You need to set up the BS-300 strictly as instructed by this manual
before using it. To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent
volume and wavelength, consult instructions of reagents.

Backing Up Data

NOTE:
The BS-300 automatically backs up the data to the built-in hard disk.
However, data loss is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical
damage of the disk. Mindray recommends you regularly backs up the
data to such medium as CDs.

Computer and Printer

NOTE:
Refer to their user’s manuals for details.

External Equipment

WARNING:
External equipment connected to the system, such as PC and printer,
shall be consistent with IEC 60950 or EN 60950.

9
Contents

Preface.......................................................................................................................................... 1
Who Should Read This Manual ............................................................................................. 1
What Can You Find in This Manual........................................................................................ 1
Conventions Used in This Manual ......................................................................................... 1
Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................. 4
Precautions on Use................................................................................................................ 6

Contents ........................................................................................................................................ i

1 System Description .......................................................................................................... 1-1


1.1 Hardware Introduction ......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Analyzing Unit ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Operation Unit .................................................................................... 1-14
1.1.3 Output Unit ......................................................................................... 1-14
1.2 Software Introduction......................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.1 Software Interface .............................................................................. 1-14
1.2.2 Main Interface Components ............................................................... 1-16
1.2.3 Mouse Operations .............................................................................. 1-19

2 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 2-1


2.1 Unpacking............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Installation Requirements .................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Installation Environment Requirements................................................ 2-1
2.2.2 Power Requirements............................................................................ 2-2
2.2.3 Temperature and Humidity Requirements............................................ 2-2
2.2.4 Water Supply and Drain Requirements................................................ 2-3
2.2.5 Space and Accessibility Requirements................................................. 2-3
2.3 Connecting the Tanks .......................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Connecting the Deionized Water Tank ................................................. 2-4
2.3.2 Connecting the Waste Tank.................................................................. 2-5

3 Basic Operations .............................................................................................................. 3-1


3.1 Daily Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Preparing for Analysis.......................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Checking before Startup....................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Power-on .............................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.3 Starting the System Software ............................................................... 3-3
3.2.4 Setting Up the BS-300.......................................................................... 3-4
3.2.5 Preparing for Analysis .......................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Starting Analysis .................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.1 Calibration ............................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.2 QC ........................................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.3 Samples................................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.4 Editing Results of Sample Runs........................................................... 3-7
3.3.5 Printing Results of Sample Runs.......................................................... 3-7
3.4 Finishing Analysis ................................................................................................ 3-8
3.4.1 Exiting the Operating Software............................................................. 3-8
3.4.2 Shutdown.............................................................................................. 3-8
3.4.3 Checking after Shutdown ..................................................................... 3-8

4 Advanced Operations....................................................................................................... 4-1


i
Contents

4.1 Routine ................................................................................................................ 4-1


4.1.1 Samples................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 Calibration ............................................................................................ 4-7
4.1.3 QC ........................................................................................................ 4-8
4.1.4 Status.................................................................................................. 4-10
4.1.5 Start .................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1.6 Probe Stop.......................................................................................... 4-39
4.1.7 Stop .................................................................................................... 4-40
4.1.8 Exit......................................................................................................4-40
4.1.9 Emergency Exit .................................................................................. 4-41
4.2 Parameters ........................................................................................................ 4-41
4.2.1 Tests ................................................................................................... 4-41
4.2.2 Reagents ............................................................................................ 4-63
4.2.3 Calibration .......................................................................................... 4-70
4.2.4 QC ......................................................................................................4-85
4.3 Data .................................................................................................................4-107
4.3.1 Export Data....................................................................................... 4-107
4.3.2 Import Data....................................................................................... 4-111
4.3.3 Patient Info. ...................................................................................... 4-113
4.3.4 Result ............................................................................................... 4-115
4.4 System............................................................................................................. 4-131
4.4.1 Status................................................................................................ 4-131
4.4.2 Setup ................................................................................................ 4-134
4.4.3 Hospital............................................................................................. 4-141
4.4.4 User ..................................................................................................4-147
4.4.5 Log.................................................................................................... 4-152
4.4.6 Maintenance ..................................................................................... 4-154
4.4.7 Print .................................................................................................. 4-167
4.4.8 Temperature ..................................................................................... 4-173
4.4.9 Database .......................................................................................... 4-175
4.5 Help .................................................................................................................4-177
4.5.1 Version.............................................................................................. 4-177
4.5.2 Guide ................................................................................................ 4-177

5 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 5-1


5.1 Preparation .......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes ................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Checking/Washing Sample Probe........................................................ 5-3
5.2.3 Checking/Washing Reagent Probe ...................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Checking/Washing Mixing Bar ............................................................. 5-4
5.2.5 Checking Detergents............................................................................ 5-4
5.2.6 Checking Connection of Deionized Water............................................ 5-4
5.2.7 Checking Connection of Wastewater ................................................... 5-6
5.2.8 Checking Remaining Deionized Water................................................. 5-7
5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank........................................................................... 5-8
5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket ......................................................... 5-9
5.3 Weekly Maintenance ......................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe...................................................................... 5-10
5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe .................................................................... 5-12
5.3.3 Washing Mixing Bar............................................................................ 5-14
5.3.4 Washing Deionized Water Tank .........................................................5-15
5.3.5 Washing Waste Tank .......................................................................... 5-16
5.3.6 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment ................................................. 5-18
5.3.7 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment................................................ 5-19
5.3.8 Cleaning Panel of Analyzing Unit ....................................................... 5-20
5.4 Monthly Maintenance ........................................................................................ 5-20
5.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe ............................................... 5-20
5.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe.............................................. 5-21
5.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Mixing Bar ..................................................... 5-22

ii
Contents

5.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor............................................................ 5-22


5.4.5 Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor .......................................................... 5-23
5.4.6 Cleaning Mixing Bar Rotor ................................................................. 5-23
5.5 Maintenance Every Six Months .........................................................................5-24
5.6 Irregular Maintenance........................................................................................ 5-25
5.6.1 Unclogging Sample Probe.................................................................. 5-25
5.6.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe ................................................................ 5-31
5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe.................................................................... 5-37
5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe .................................................................. 5-38
5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar ......................................................................... 5-39
5.6.6 Replacing Plunger Assembly of Sample/Reagent Syringe ................ 5-42
5.6.7 Replacing Lamp ................................................................................. 5-45
5.7 Maintenance Log ...............................................................................................5-47

6 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Classification of Error Messages ......................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Corrective Measures ........................................................................................... 6-4

7 Calculation Methods......................................................................................................... 7-1


7.1 Reaction Types .................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Endpoint ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Fixed-Time............................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.3 Kinetic................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Calculation Process............................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.1 AD Value → Absorbance...................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 Absorbance → Response .................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Response → Calibration Parameter..................................................... 7-9
7.2.4 Calibration Parameter → Test Result/QC Result ............................... 7-13
7.2.5 QC Result → QC Conclusion ............................................................. 7-15

Appendix A Specifications............................................................................................ A-1


A.1 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................A-1
A.2 Power Requirements ...........................................................................................A-2
A.3 Environmental Requirements ..............................................................................A-2
A.3.1 Storage Requirements..........................................................................A-2
A.3.2 Operation Requirements ......................................................................A-2
A.4 Dimension and Weight ........................................................................................A-2
A.5 Other Specifications.............................................................................................A-3
A.6 Input/Output Devices ...........................................................................................A-3
A.7 Interface...............................................................................................................A-3

Appendix B Supplies ..................................................................................................... B-1

Appendix C Index........................................................................................................... C-1

iii
1 System Description
This chapter includes the following two sections:

Hardware Introduction
Software Introduction

The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer (hereinafter referred to as the BS-300) is a


chemistry system that is designed for the in vitro quantitative determination of clinical
chemistries in serum, plasma, urine or CSF samples.

NOTE:
Not all the parameters the reagents claim capable of testing can be
tested on the BS-300. Consult the reagent suppliers for detailed
information.

1.1 Hardware Introduction


The BS-300 consists of the following three units – the analyzing unit, operation unit
and output unit. The analyzing unit and the operation unit are as shown in Figure
1-1.

Figure 1-1 Overview of the analyzing unit and the operation unit

1-1
System Description

1.1.1 Analyzing Unit


The analyzing unit handles all the analyzing operations, which include dispensing
samples and reagents, mixing, reaction and measurement, automatically replacing
reaction cuvettes, etc.

The analyzing unit consists of the following major parts:

Sample disk assembly


Sample dispenser
Reagent disk assembly
Reagent dispenser
Mixer
Reaction cuvette loader
Reaction disk assembly
Photometric system

Figure 1-2 Top view

1-2
System Description

Figure 1-3 Front view

Upper Cover

ANALYZING UNIT POWER


POWER

Middle Door Power Plug

Mounting Hole

Lower Door

Connect the power cord to the power plug shown in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-4 Rear view

DEIONIZED WATER: If you choose to feed deionized water from the back of
the analyzing unit, pull the deionized water tubing into the unit from here;
D-SENSOR: If you choose to feed deionized water from the back of the
analyzing unit, pull the cable of the deionized water level detector into the unit
from here;

1-3
System Description

WASTE: If choose to discharge waste from the back of the analyzing unit, pull
the waste tubing out of the unit from here;
W-SENSOR: If you choose to discharge the waste from the back of the
analyzing unit, pull the cable of the waste level detector out of the unit from
here;
COM: It is the serial port for communication with the operation unit;
RESET: You can press this button to restart the analyzing unit when it stops
responding.

WARNING:
Press the RESET button only when the analyzing unit stops
responding. Do not press this button when the unit is working normally.
Otherwise, it may lead to system failure, unreliable analysis results or
serious unexpected consequences.

1.1.1.1 Sample Disk

The sample disk (as Figure 1-5 shows) holds sample tubes and rotates
(counter-clockwise only) the designated tube to the position for the sample probe to
aspirate.

Figure 1-5 Sample disk

The sample disk is composed of two circles – an inner circle and an outer circle. It
provides 60 tube positions, 30 on the inner circle and 30 on the outer circle. Every
tube position has an identification number. Positions 1-45 are for samples, E1-E5 for
emergency samples, S1-S6 for calibrators, C1-C3 for controls, and W for distilled
water. All the other positions except the position W can be used for samples, too.

The sample disk can hold six types of tubes – micro sample cup, collection tube, Φ
12mm×68.5mm, Φ12mm ×99mm, Φ12.7mm×75mm and Φ12.7mm×100mm.

To install the sample disk, keep the handle at the vertical position, align the central
hole of the handwheel to the rotor, gently lower the sample disk all the way down
(rotate the disk a bit as necessary) and move the handle back to the horizontal

1-4
System Description

position to secure the disk to the rotor. When you have finished installing the disk, grab
the handwheel and lightly pull it upward. If the disk remains secured, it means it is
well installed.

To remove the sample disk, first shift the handle from the horizontal position to the
vertical position. Then grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to
remove it from the rotor.

To load sample tubes, insert the tube into the tube holder until the bottom of the tube
contacts the groove on the tube rack.

To remove sample tubes, grab the tube and pull it upward to remove it from the tube
holder.

WARNING:
Before installing/removing the sample disk, make sure the analyzing
unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped.
Before installing/removing the sample tubes, make sure the analyzing
unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped.
Do not use sample tubes other than the specified.
Before running the analyzing unit, make sure that the sample disk
cover is closed and the round red mark on the cover is aligned with its
counterpart on the panel. Otherwise the sample probe may be
damaged.
If samples spill in the sample compartment or on the sample disk, be
sure to wipe the spills with cloth soaked with water or disinfector after
turning off the analyzing unit.

1.1.1.2 Sample Dispenser

The sample dispenser is composed of a sample probe, probe arm, probe rotor
(Figure 1-6), syringe (Figure 1-7) and a fluid system. It aspirates certain amount of
sample from the designated sample tube and dispenses the aspirated sample to the
designated reaction cuvette.

Open the middle door of the analyzing unit and you will see the sample syringe (right)
and the reagent syringe (left). The sample syringe can aspirate/dispense 3-45µl of
sample and its minimum scale is 0.5µl.

1-5
System Description

Figure 1-6 Sample dispenser

Figure 1-7 Sample syringe

Sample Syringe

To dispense the sample, the sample probe first moves to the sample tube to aspirate
certain amount of the sample, then to the reaction disk to dispense the aspirated
sample to a reaction cuvette and finally to the wash well for cleaning.

The sample probe can automatically detect the sample level. When the sample
probe contacts obstacles in the vertical direction, its safeguard will automatically
protect the probe from damage.

WARNING:
When the analyzing unit is running, do not place any part of your body
or any obstacle in the route the arm moves. Otherwise, it may lead to
personnel injury or equipment damage.

1-6
System Description

1.1.1.3 Reagent Disk Assembly

The reagent disk assembly is composed of a reagent disk and a refrigerator.

The reagent disk (as Figure 1-8 shows) holds the reagent bottles and rotates
(counter-clockwise only) the designated bottle to the position for the reagent probe to
aspirate.

The refrigerator keeps the reagents in a low temperature environment to keep them
stable and minimize volatilization.

Figure 1-8 Reagent disk

The reagent disk has two circles, inner circle and outer circle. There are 25 reagent
positions in each circle and the reagent disk has totally 50 reagent positions. The
reagent disk can hold the Mindray inner-circle bottles, Mindray outer-circle bottles,
Hitachi 7060 bottles and Hitachi 7170 bottles.

The refrigerator can run 24 hours a day to keep the temperature at 4-10˚С.

NOTE:
The refrigerator has a power supply independent of that of the
analyzing unit. It will be put into service once the POWER is turned on.

To install the reagent disk, keep the handle at the vertical position, align the central
hole of the handwheel to the rotor, gently lower the reagent disk all the way down
(rotate the disk a bit as necessary) and move the handle back to the horizontal
position to secure the disk to the rotor. When you have finished installing the disk, grab
the handwheel and lightly pull it upward. If the disk remains secured, it means it is
well installed.

To remove the reagent disk, first shift the handle from the horizontal position to the
vertical position. Then grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to
remove it from the rotor.

1-7
System Description

To load reagent bottles, insert the bottle into the bottle holder until the bottom of the
bottle contacts the groove on the bottle rack.

To remove the reagent bottle, grab the bottle and pull it upward to remove it from the
bottle holder.

WARNING:
Before installing/removing the reagent disk, make sure the analyzing
unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped.
Before installing/removing the reagent bottles, make sure the
analyzing unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped. When
installing the bottle, make sure the bottle bottom is in full contact with
the bottle rack.
Before running the analyzing unit, make sure that the reagent disk
cover is closed and the round red mark on the cover is aligned with its
counterpart on the panel. Otherwise the sample probe may be
damaged and cooling capacity of the refrigerator will be degraded.
If reagents spill in the reagent compartment or on the reagent disk, be
sure to wipe the spills with cloth soaked with water or disinfector after
turning off the analyzing unit.

1.1.1.4 Reagent Dispenser

The reagent dispenser is composed of a reagent probe, probe arm, probe rotor
(Figure 1-9), syringe (Figure 1-10) and fluid system. It aspirates certain amount of
reagent from the designated reagent bottle and dispenses the aspirated reagent to
the designated reaction cuvette. The reagent probe arm can preheat the aspirated
reagent.

Open the middle door of the analyzing unit and you will see the reagent syringe
(right) and reagent syringe (left). The reagent syringe can aspirate/dispense
30-450µl of reagent and its minimum scale is 1µl.

Figure 1-9 Reagent dispenser

1-8
System Description

Figure 1-10 Reagent syringe

To dispense the reagent, the reagent probe first moves to the reagent bottle to
aspirate certain amount of the reagent, then to the reaction disk to dispense the
aspirated reagent to a reaction cuvette and finally to the wash well for cleaning.

The reagent probe can automatically detect the reagent level. When the reagent
probe contacts obstacles in the vertical direction its safeguard will automatically
function to protect the probe from damage.

WARNING:
When the analyzing unit is running, do not place any part of your body
or any obstacle in the route the arm moves. Otherwise, it may lead to
personnel injury or equipment damage.

1.1.1.5 Mixer

The mixer is composed of a mixing bar, bar arm and rotor, as Figure 1-11 shows.
The mixing bar thoroughly stirs the reaction mixture (reagents and sample) in the
reaction cuvette.

1-9
System Description

Figure 1-11 Mixer

For the single-reagent test, the mixer starts to work after the sample is dispensed
into the reaction cuvette. For the double-reagent test, the mixer starts to work after
the sample or the second reagent is dispensed into the reaction cuvette. The mixing
bar moves to a position above the reaction disk, lowers into the cuvette, and rotates
to mix the mixture in the cuvette. After that, the bar moves to the wash well for
cleaning and de-watering.

1.1.1.6 Reaction Cuvette Loader

The cuvette loader is composed of a cuvette feeder, manipulator and used-cuvette


bucket.

This loader loads new cuvettes to the reaction disk and dumps used cuvettes into a
bucket. The feeder is located in the cuvette compartment and transfers cuvettes to
the manipulator, which grabs the cuvettes and loads them to the reaction disk and
then unloads the used cuvettes and dumps them into the used-cuvette bucket. Open
the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the used-cuvette bucket in the
middle.

NOTE:
Normally, the used-cuvette bucket can hold 80 segments of reaction
cuvettes (10 cuvettes per segment). Be sure to empty the bucket in
time so that excessive cuvettes will not overflow and contaminate the
cabinet.

Disposable cuvettes are adopted as the reaction cuvettes. Ten cuvettes are bound
together as one cuvette segment. The cuvette compartment can house 30 cuvette
segments, which are sufficient for 300 continuous tests.

When all the cuvettes of a cuvette segment have been used, the reaction disk
rotates the segment to the unloading position, and then the manipulator dumps the
used segment into the used-cuvette bucket and load the new segment. When a
segment is taken from the cuvette compartment, the cuvette feeder pushes the next
segment to the loading position.

1-10
System Description

When there are less than 10 segments in the compartment, the analyzing unit,
though keeping working, will give an alarm. Seeing the alarm, you should, if you still
have more tests to do, add more segments to the compartment.

When all the segments in the compartment are used, the analyzing unit will stop first
loading cuvette segments, and then stop dispensing samples when all the segments
on the reaction disk are used. But it will keep working until all the scheduled tests are
done.

Present the cuvette segment to the entry of the cuvette feeder as Figure 1-12 shows
and gently push it toward inside. Load all the segments one by one until they are all
loaded. When you are done, click the Load Cuvette button (refer to 4.1.4.2 Reaction
Disk tab for details) to command the cuvette feeder to press the newly added
segments forward. Be sure not to load the segments as Figure 1-13 shows.

NOTE:
When loading cuvette segments to the entry of the cuvette
compartment, be sure to keep them upright. Remove the inclined
segments immediately upon seeing them and reload them the right
way.
Be sure to load the segments to the cuvette compartment in the right
direction (Figure 1-12). Reversely loaded segments (Figure 1-13) may
jam the loader and halts the analyzing unit.
Do not click the Load Cuvette button before completing adding all the
cuvette segments to the compartment. Otherwise, the loading
operation may fail.

Figure 1-12 Loading cuvette segments the right way

1-11
System Description

Figure 1-13 Loading cuvette segments the wrong way

Open the middle door to load/remove the used-cuvette bucket.

BIOHAZARD:
Be sure to load the used-cuvette bucket to the designated position on
the bottom plate. Otherwise, the used-cuvette may not be dumped into
the bucket and the spilled reaction mixture may contaminate and
corrode the cabinet.
Be sure to wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when loading
or removing the used-cuvette bucket.
Be sure to dispose of the used-cuvette in compliance with the local
regulations.

1.1.1.7 Reaction Disk Assembly

The reaction disk assembly is composed of a reaction disk and a


temperature-controlled chamber, both of which are inside the analyzing unit.

The reaction disk holds the reaction cuvettes, in which the sample reacts with the
reagents and colorimetric readings are taken.

The temperature-controlled chamber provides for the reaction an environment of


consistent temperature.

The reaction disk can hold 8 cuvette segments (80 cuvettes). The cuvettes adopted
are

Disposable;
5mm×6mm×25mm (5mm optical path);
750µl (capable of holding 180-500µl of the reaction mixture).

The temperature chamber keeps the temperature at 37±0.3˚С with ±0.1˚С


fluctuation.

1-12
System Description

BIOHAZARD:
Be sure to dispose of the used cuvettes in compliance with the local
regulations.

CAUTION:
The reaction cuvettes should not be re-used. Otherwise, the system
performance may be degraded.

During the analyzing process, the reaction disk rotates (counter-clock wise only) to
cuvette-loading position, sample-dispensing position, reagent-dispensing position, or
mixing position as needed. The colorimetric readings are taken when the specified
cuvette passes through the optical axis.

Figure 1-14 Layout of reaction disk

Manipulator

One
Segment

Position to Mixing
(28#)

Position to Dispensing
Position to Dispensing Sample (23#)
Reagent (1#)

Nine Optical Path

1.1.1.8 Photometric System

The photometric system measures the absorbance of the reacting liquid in the
reaction cuvettes. It consists of a measurement optical system and a reference
optical system, the former providing 9 monochromatic lights and the latter
compensating the former.

1-13
System Description

Specifications
9 optical paths with fixed interference filters.
Wavelengths: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm, 670nm,
700nm
Half band-width: ≤12nm
Wavelength accuracy: ±2nm
Measurement range: -0.1-5.0 Abs
Lamp: 12V 50VA tungsten-halogen

Movement
The measurement optical system consists of 9 optical paths. The absorbance is
taken when the reaction cuvette rotates to the correspond path. The BS-300 can
measure the absorbance of 9 cuvettes simultaneously.

1.1.2 Operation Unit


The operation unit is a computer with the Operating Software of BS-300 Chemistry
Analyzer installed. It manages test applications, registration, generation of the work
list, monitoring of reactions, calculation and data management (entering, storing and
searching).

1.1.3 Output Unit


The output unit is a printer that prints out the test results.

1.2 Software Introduction

1.2.1 Software Interface


The interface of the Operating Software of BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer (hereinafter
referred to as the operating software) is shown in Figure 1-15.

1-14
System Description

Figure 1-15 Interface of the operating software

37

Pull-down menu

System status
Menu area Header area Title bar Shortcut buttons
area

Display area

Warning messages area Period area Time area Operator area

Header area
Displays the names of the operating software and the manufacturer.

Title bar
Displays the title of the current display area.

Menu area
Displays: [Routine], [Parameters], [Data], [System], [Help]. You can move the
mouse to any of the listed menu and click the left button of the mouse (hereinafter
referred to as click) to display its pull-down menu.

Pull-down menu
You can click the listed item of the pull-down menu to perform certain operation.

Small buttons
Click the small button to view the user guide. You can also click Help → Guide
to view the user guide. Refer to 4.5.2 Guide for details.

Click the small button to exit the operating software. You can also click Routine
→ Exit to exit the software. Refer to 4.1.8 Exit for details.

Shortcut buttons

Totally 13 buttons are available, which are: , , , ,

, , , , , , , , . You
can click any of the buttons to perform certain operation quickly.

Display area

1-15
System Description

Displays settings, results, graphics and so on.

System status area


Displays the system status and reaction temperature.

Warning messages area


Displays the warning messages, including malfunction alarm messages and prompt
messages for mis-operation. When seeing the warning messages, refer to 5
Troubleshooting for solutions.

Period area
Displays how many periods (every period lasts 12 seconds) of test have passed
since the beginning of the first test after the latest power-on.

Time area
Displays current date and time.

Operator area
Displays the current operator who operates the system.

1.2.2 Main Interface Components


Dialog box
The dialog box is one of the most common interfaces. See the following example:

Tab
See the figure below for examples of the tab. Click the tab and you can access the
screen that it indexes.

1-16
System Description

Tab

Combo box
Click “▼” and a pull-down list will display, as the figure below shows. Click the
desired item to select it.

Combo box

Option button
Click the option button to select the option it represents. Note that for a given group
of option buttons, you can only select one of them.

Option button

Check box
Click the check box to select the option it represents and click it again to de-select it.
Note that for a given group of check boxes, you can choose more than one of them
at one time.

1-17
System Description

Check box

Edit box
You can enter characters from the keyboard in the edit box.

Edit box

Button
Click a button and you can access the function it indexes.

Scroll bar
When the contents to be displayed are too many for one screen, you can use the
scroll bar to see the hidden contents. Move the cursor to the scroll bar, press left
button of the mouse and hold it, then you can drag the scroll bar upward or
downward to see the hidden contents. Or you can press the key such as Page Up,
Page Down,↑or↓on the keyboard to see the hidden contents.

Scroll bar

1-18
System Description

1.2.3 Mouse Operations


Clicking
In this manual, “clicking” refers to moving the pointer of the mouse to the desired
item and click the left button of the mouse.

Double-clicking
In this manual, “double-clicking” refers to moving the pointer of the mouse to the
desired item and click the left button of the mouse twice swiftly.

Working with the keyboard


When you wan to select multiple targets, you need to use the mouse together with
the keyboard.

To select discontinuous targets:


Press and hold CTRL and click them one by one. Release CTRL when you have
selected all the targets.

To select continuous targets:


Click the first (or last) of the desired targets, and then press and hold SHIFT and
click the last (or the first) of the desired targets. Release SHIFT when you have
selected all the targets.

1-19
2 Installation

WARNING:
The BS-300 should be installed by Mindray-authorized personnel only.

To facilitate the installation, you should prepare a place meeting the requirements
specified in 2.2 Installation Requirements. If you need to move the BS-300 to
another site, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local
distributor, who are the appropriate people for the moving job.

2.1 Unpacking
When you receive your BS-300, carefully inspect the package. If you see any signs
of mishandling or damage, file a claim immediately with Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

After opening the package, check the delivered goods against the packing list as
well as the appearance of the BS-300. If you find anything missing or damaged, alert
Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor immediately.

2.2 Installation Requirements

CAUTION:
Make sure the BS-300 is installed in a place meeting the following
requirements. Otherwise, it will not perform as promised.

2.2.1 Installation Environment Requirements


This BS-300 is for indoor use only.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (gradient less than 1/200).
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to bear 500Kg weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated.

CAUTION:
The BS-300 radiates heat from its rear side when operating. A
well-ventilated environment helps keep the room temperature stable.
Use ventilation equipment if necessary. But if so, be sure not to
expose the BS-300 to the direct draft that may lead to unreliable
results.

2-1
Installation

The site should be free of dusts as much as possible.


The site should not be in direct sun.
The site should not be near a heat or draft source.
The site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
The site should not be disturbed by large noise or power supply.
The BS-300 should not be placed near brush-type motors and electrical
contacts that are frequently turned on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters that generate
electromagnetic waves near BS-300.
The above-sea-level height of the site should be lower than 2000 meters.

WARNING:
When the forward or backward gradient is more than 8 degrees, the
BS-300 may tip over. Be sure to take proper measures when
transporting and storing it.

2.2.2 Power Requirements


Power supply: AC 100-130V/200-240V, 50/60Hz, three-wire power cord and
properly grounded.
The analyzer should be connected to a properly-grounded power socket, whose
maximum power consumption should be 1kVA and neutral-to-ground voltage ≤
6V. If possible, connect the BS-300 to a power line specially designed for
medical instrumentation.
The distance between the power socket and the analyzer should be less than 5
meters.

WARNING:
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding
may lead to electric shock and/or equipment damage.
Be sure to connect the BS-300 to a power socket that meets the
above-mentioned requirements and has a proper fuse installed.

2.2.3 Temperature and Humidity Requirements


Store the BS-300 in a 0˚С-40˚С environment. When the BS-300 is running, be
sure to fix the ambient temperature between 15˚С-30˚С with fluctuation less
than ±2˚С/H.

2-2
Installation

CAUTION:
Storing the BS-300 in an environment other than the specified may
damage its fluidic system.
Operating the BS-300 in an environment other than the specified may
lead to unreliable test results.

The relative humidity should be between 35%RH-80%RH and no condensation.

CAUTION:
When used in conditions other than the specified, the BS-300 may not
provide reliable test results. If the temperature or relative humidity
does not meet the above-mentioned requirements, be sure to use
air-conditioning equipment.

2.2.4 Water Supply and Drain Requirements


The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water.
The water temperature should be >5˚С.
If water-purifying equipment is used, the pressure at the source should be
between 49kPa-392kPa.

BIOHAZARD:
Be sure to dispose of the waste according to the local regulations.

CAUTION:
The water to be used on the BS-300 must meet the requirements of
the CAP Type II water. Insufficiently purified water may result in
misleading measurement.

2.2.5 Space and Accessibility Requirements


See the figure below for the space and accessibility requirements.

2-3
Installation

Figure 2-1 Space and accessibility requirements

WALL

Minimum500 Maximum2500

Operation
Unit
710 Analyzing Unit

980
F
Minimum500

R
O
N
T

Minimum500 Minimum500
Unit: mm

2.3 Connecting the Tanks

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.

2.3.1 Connecting the Deionized Water Tank


1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit.
3 Pull out the extractable plate.
4 Put the pickup tubes and the sensor into the deionized water tank, then
close the cap of the deionized water tank clockwise.
5 Put the deionized water tank on the right of the extractable plate.
6 Push the extractable plate back in.

2-4
Installation

7 Plug the green connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn
the connector clockwise until secure.

Deionized Water Connector Deionized Water Connector


(Green) (Red) BNC Connector

Pickup Tube

8 Plug the red connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn
the connector clockwise until secure.
9 Plug the BNC connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn
the connector clockwise until secure.
10 Close the lower door.

2.3.2 Connecting the Waste Tank


1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit.
3 Pull out the extractable plate.
4 Put the waste tube and the sensor into the waste tank, then close the cap
of the waste tank clockwise.
5 Put the waste tank on the left of the extractable plate.
6 Push the extractable plate back in.
7 Keep pressing the pin on the connector and grab the waste tap and insert
it to the connector.
BNC Connector Waste Connector

Pin

Waste Tap
Waste Tube

8 Plug the BNC connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn
the connector clockwise until secure.
9 Close the lower door.

2-5
3 Basic Operations
This chapter provides step-by-step procedures for operating the BS-300 for basic
tasks.

3.1 Daily Procedure

Checking before Startup

Power-on

Starting the System Software

Use the system first time?


or
Need to set parameters?

YES
NO
Setting Up the
BS-300 Analyzer

Preparing for Analysis

Need to run reagent blank analysis?

YES
NO
Reagent Blank

Need to run calibration analysis?

YES

Calibration NO

QC

Samples

Need to edit sample results?

YES

NO Editing Sample Results

Printing Results

Exiting the System Software

Shutdown

Checking after Shutdown

3-1
Basic Operations

3.2 Preparing for Analysis

3.2.1 Checking before Startup


Do the followings checks before starting the BS-300.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when performing the
below checks.

Check the power supply and make sure it can supply proper voltage for the
analyzer.
Check the connections among the analyzing unit, operation unit and printer.
Make sure the connections are right and secure. Check the power cords of the
analyzing unit, operation unit and printer and make sure they are well
connected to power sockets.
Check and make sure sufficient printing paper is prepared for the printer.
Check the sample and reagent syringes for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1
Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes.
Check the sample and reagent probes and make sure there is no fluid hanging
on the probe tips. If there is, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.
Check the connections of the deionized water and wastewater as instructed by
5.2.6 Checking Connection of Deionized Water and 5.2.7 Checking
Connection of Wastewater.
Check the sample probe and make sure it is neither dirty nor bent. If it is dirty,
wash it as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe; if it is bent, replace it as
instructed by 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe.
Check the reagent probe and make sure it is neither dirty nor bent. If it is dirty,
wash it as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe; if it is bent, replace it
as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe.
Check the mixing bar and make sure it is neither dirty nor bent. If it is dirty, wash
it as instructed by 5.3.3 Washing Mixing Bar; if it is bent, replace it as
instructed by 5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar.
Check the cuvette compartment and make sure there are sufficient cuvettes in it.
If the cuvettes are not sufficient, add more cuvettes as instructed by 1.1.1.6
Reaction Cuvette Loader.

CAUTION:
You must prepare enough cuvettes for the upcoming analysis. If you
find the cuvettes are not enough, add more immediately.
Sometimes the new cuvettes are not as smooth as they should be.
Check the surface of the cuvettes for bumps and take necessary
measures to remove the found bumps before loading them to the
compartment. Otherwise, they may jam the analyzing unit.

3-2
Basic Operations

Check and make sure there is enough deionized water in the deionized water
tank as instructed by 5.2.8 Checking Remaining Deionized Water.

CAUTION:
You must prepare enough deionized water. If you find the deionized
water is not enough, add more deionized water to the tank.

Check the waste tank and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the tank as
instructed by 5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank.
Check the used-cuvettes bucket and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the
bucket as instructed by 5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket.

3.2.2 Power-on
Power up the BS-300 in the sequence presented below:

Place the POWER to ON.


Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON.
Press the power button of the monitor of the operation unit.
Press the power button of the computer of the operation unit.
Press the power button of the printer.

3.2.3 Starting the System Software

NOTE:
Ensure the hibernation function of the display is unavailable:
After entering the display properties screen, select Never for Turn off
monitor, Turn off hard disks and System standby on the Power
Schemes tab and do not select Enable hibernation on the Hibernate
tab.

After you have logged on the WINDOWS operating system, you may

Double-click the icon on the desktop to start the system software; or


Click [START] → [PROGRAM] or [ALL PROGRAMGS]→[BS-300 Chemistry
Analyzer Control System]→[BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer Control System] to
start the system software.

The control system will do the initialization procedure in the sequence presented
below:

Initializing system environment.


Initializing database.
Initializing printer.
Downloading system settings from the analyzing unit.
3-3
Basic Operations

Shaking hands with the analyzing unit.

The system does the startup and warm-up procedures in the sequence presented
below and the analyzer will then enter the standby state:

Initializing database, system environment and printer; downloading settings;


shaking hands with the modules; running self-tests and resetting the modules. A
dialog box will then pop up to ask you to enter your username and password.

NOTE:
You need to enter proper username and password to access the
control system. Use the initial username and password (username:
administrator; password: bs300) if this is the first time the control
system being used and then you may edit your own username and
password as instructed by 4.4.4 User.

Measuring dark currents;


Turning on the lamp of the photometer and loading the first cuvette segment to
measure the backgrounds, which reflects the status of the lamp;
Loading new cuvettes, taking their absorbance and marking the dirty ones;
Checking the status of the deionized water tank and waste tank and checking
the status of the cuvette compartment;
Performing the default washing procedure to wash the exteriors and interiors of
the sample probe, reagent probe and mixing bar with deionized water;
Checking the status of the reaction disk repeatedly and displaying its
temperature on the main interface. When the warm-up process is still under way,
the status box in the upper right corner displays Incubation and when the
expected temperature is reached it displays Idle, indicating the analyzing unit is
on standby.

CAUTION:
You may start the analysis once the initialization is finished. However,
Mindray recommends you wait until the temperature and photometric
system is fully stabilized, which is when the status box displays Idle
and the analyzer has been turned on for 30 minutes.

3.2.4 Setting Up the BS-300


The analyzer will not function properly unless it is properly set up.

You must complete all the following settings if this is the first time the analyzer being
used.

Before requesting the tests, you must finish the following settings:

To set the options regarding the basic parameters of the system, refer to 4.4.2
Setup.
To set the options regarding the hospital information, refer to 4.4.3 Hospital.

3-4
Basic Operations

To set the options regarding test parameters and reference, refer to 4.2.1.1
Parameters tab and 4.2.1.2 Expected tab.
To set the options regarding calibrators and calibration, refer to 4.2.3.1
Calibrator tab and 4.2.3.2 Calibration tab.
To set the options regarding controls, QC rule and QC test, refer to 4.2.4.1
Controls tab, 4.2.4.2 QC Rules tab and 4.2.4.3 QC tab.
To set the options regarding the reagent parameters, refer to 4.2.2.1 Reagent
Disk tab.
To set the options regarding the carryover information among tests, refer to
4.2.1.5 Carryover tab.
To set the options regarding the printing parameters, refer to 4.4.7 Print.

3.2.5 Preparing for Analysis

3.2.5.1 Preparing Reagents

Load reagent bottles to their assigned positions on the reagent disk. Open the
bottles.

3.2.5.2 Preparing Distilled Water

Load distilled water to position W on the sample disk. Ensure enough distilled water
is prepared.

Load distilled water to position 49 on the reagent disk. Ensure enough distilled water
is prepared.

3.2.5.3 Checking Remaining Reagents

Check remaining reagents if necessary. Refer to 4.2.2.2 Leftover tab for details.

3.3 Starting Analysis

3.3.1 Calibration
You must calibrate if this is the first time the analyzer being used.

CAUTION:
You need to run the calibration again when you change reagent lots,
test parameters, lamp or other conditions.

To request calibrations, refer to 4.1.2 Calibration.

3-5
Basic Operations

After requesting calibrations, you should load corresponding calibrators to their


assigned positions on the sample disk.

NOTE:
Ensure the calibrators are loaded to the corresponding positions on
the sample disk.

To run calibrations, refer to 4.1.5 Start.

A calibration run experiences 4 states: Requested, Waiting, Running, Finished.


You can check the results of the finished runs in the following ways.

To view the results at the Status→Calib. Status, refer to 4.1.4.4 Calib. Status
tab.
To view the results at the Status→Sample Disk, refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk
tab.
To view the results at the Calibration→Calib. Data, refer to 4.2.3.3 Calib. Data
tab.

3.3.2 QC
To request QCs, refer to 4.1.3 QC.

After requesting QCs, you should load corresponding controls to their assigned
positions on the sample disk.

To run QCs, refer to 4.1.5 Start.

A QC run experiences 4 states: Requested, Waiting, Running, Finished. You can


check the results of the finished runs in the following ways.

To view the results at the Status→QC Status, refer to 4.1.4.5 QC Status tab.
To view the results at the Status→Sample Disk, refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk
tab.
To view the results at the QC→Real-time/Daily/Day-to-day, refer to 4.2.4.4
Real-time tab, 4.2.4.5 Daily tab or 4.2.4.6 Day-to-day tab.

3.3.3 Samples
To request samples, refer to 4.1.1 Samples.

You can request a STAT sample run in the way similar to an ordinary run, except that
you have to tick the check box to the right of STAT, as Figure3-1 shows. The
requested STAT run will be inserted into the current work list as Waiting and has
higher priority than other tests.

3-6
Basic Operations

Figure3-1 Requesting a STAT Sample Run

After requesting, load the samples to their corresponding positions on the sample
disk.

CAUTION:
Ensure the samples are loaded to correct positions. Otherwise, you
cannot acquire correct results.

To run samples, refer to 4.1.5 Start.

A sample run experiences 4 states: Requested, Waiting, Running, Finished. You


can check the results of the finished runs in the following ways.

To view the results at the Status→Test Status, refer to 4.1.4.3 Test Status tab.
To view the results at the Status→Sample Disk, refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk
tab.
To view the results at the Data→Result→Test Data, refer to 4.3.4.1 Test Data
tab.

3.3.4 Editing Results of Sample Runs


Skip this section if you do not need to edit the sample run results.

CAUTION:
Sample run results can only be edited by authorized personnel.

To edit one or more sample run results, refer to 4.1.4.3 Test Status tab or 4.3.4.1
Test Data tab for details.

To revise one or more sample run results, refer to 4.1.4.3 Test Status tab or 4.3.4.1
Test Data tab for details.

3.3.5 Printing Results of Sample Runs


To print sample results, refer to 4.1.4.3 Test Status tab or 4.3.4.1 Test Data tab for
details.

3-7
Basic Operations

3.4 Finishing Analysis

3.4.1 Exiting the Operating Software


To exit the operating software, refer to 4.1.8 Exit for details.

3.4.2 Shutdown
After exiting the Windows operating system, switch off the following powers in the
presented order:

Turn off the printer;


Turn off the monitor of the operation unit;
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.

NOTE:
The refrigerator still functions after the ANALYZING UNIT POWER is
placed to OFF. To shut down the refrigerator, place the POWER to
OFF.

3.4.3 Checking after Shutdown


Cap every reagent bottle on the reagent disk.
Remove the calibrators, controls, distilled water and samples from the sample
disk.
Check the surface of the analyzing unit for stains and wipe them off with clean
soft cloth.
Check the waste tank and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the tank as
instructed by 5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank.
Check the used-cuvette bucket and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the
bucket as instructed by 5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket.

BIOHAZARD:
Exercise with caution. Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing.

3-8
4 Advanced Operations
The chapter presents an introduction of the operating software of the BS-300 by
menus.

The main interface of the operating software has five major menu groups:

Routine
Parameters
Data
System
Help

4.1 Routine

Routine Samples

Calibration

QC

Status

Start

Probe Stop

Stop

Exit

Emergency Exit

4.1.1 Samples

Click Routine → Samples, or press F1 to enter the Request Sample Runs screen,
as Figure4-1 shows. You can also enter the Request Sample Runs screen by

clicking the short-cut button .

4-1
Advanced Operations

Figure4-1 Request Sample Runs screen

The Request Sample Runs screen consists of three zones:

Sample zone – displays information regarding the samples;


Tests and Profiles zone – displays information regarding the tests and profiles;
Operating buttons zone – display such buttons as Browse, Edit, etc.

The Tests zone lists all available tests. You cannot request the tests followed by a
forbidden mark, such as . The double-reagent tests, whose reagent
positions have already been set, are yellow-framed; the double-reagent tests, whose
reagent positions have not been set yet, are gray-framed. The selected test is
followed by a green tick.

The sample parameters are interpreted as follows.

Parameter What it does How to set


Disk Defines which virtual sample disk Click “▼” to the right of Disk
the sample is located on. and select the desired disk
from the pull down list.
ID Defines the identification number Use the system-generated
of the sample or samples. You can ID(s) or enter the desired
enter the desired integers (1-9000) ID(s) manually.
into the edit boxes respectively as
the start (left) and end (right) IDs.
If you are entering only one
sample’s ID ensure the two IDs are
the same.
Index A system-generated number for
fast search.

4-2
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


Bar Code Bar code ID of the sample. Enter the ID from the bar
code reader automatically,
enter it manually, or leave it
blank.
Position Defines the sample’s position on Use the system-generated
the selected sample disk. For number or click “▼” to the
STAT samples, Mindray right of Position to select
recommends they be placed on the desired position.
positions E1-E6.
For multiple samples, the
selected position represents
that of the first sample and
the analyzer will generate
positions for the rest of the
samples.
Tube Defines which type of tube holds Click “ ▼ ” to the right of
the sample. Tube and select either
Large tube or Small tube
from the pull down list.
Sample Defines the sample type. Click “ ▼ ” to the right of
Sample and select one of
the following four types:
Serum, Plasma, Urine and
Other.
Replicates Defines for how many times the Enter the desired integer
analyzer should run this sample.
(1-10) or click the button
The default value is 1.
to the right of Replicates
until the desired integer is
reached.
STAT Defines whether the sample is a Tick the check box to the
stat sample. The analyzer will add right of STAT.
the stat sample to the current work
list.
Blank Applies to the tests that use Tick the check box to the
Endpoint method. right of Blank to enable this
function and click it again to
Defines whether to replace the disable it.
reagents with distilled water and
take the absorbance of the mixture
before formally analyzing the
reagents-sample mixture.
Diluted Defines whether to dilute the Tick the check box to the
sample before analyzing it. right of Diluted to enable
this function and click it
again to disable it.
Dilution Defines the dilution ratio. Editable Enter the desired integer
only when the Diluted check box is
(4-150) or click the
ticked.
button to the right of
Dilution until the desired
integer is reached.

4-3
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


Sample Defines the volume of the sample Enter the desired integer
Vol. to be diluted. Editable only when
(3-45) or click the button
the Diluted check box is ticked.
to the right of Volume until
the desired integer is
reached.

NOTE:
Besides the individual requirements for the entered values of Dilution
and Sample Vol., you must also guarantee their product is between
180-450.

To request samples

1 Set the parameters as instructed above.


2 Click the desired test to select it; click it again to de-select it. The selected
test will be followed by a green tick. You may select multiple tests for a
sample run.

You may also request a pre-defined profile or profiles and the selected
profile or profiles will also be followed by a green tick.

3 Click the Request button to request a sample run.

4-4
Advanced Operations

NOTE:
Routine sample can be requested on any virtual sample disk.
STAT sample can only be requested on the default virtual sample disk.
After the system is powered on, the sample disk 1 is the default at that
time.
If there are any sample runs in Waiting or Running status on a sample
disk, the disk is the default at that time.
If the system just finishes the runs on a sample disk, the disk is the
default at that time.
If you request a sample whose ID has been used on the current day
(the same ID, but the different index) and you’ve set the Bar Code and
Sample (sample type) for it, the system will consider the Bar Code
and Sample of the former one as those of the current sample. You can
change the two parameters only at the Patient Information screen.

To view a requested sample run

1 Click the Browse button.


2 Click or until the desired sample is reached.

NOTE:
Click to go to the previous sample run.

Click to go to the next sample run.

3 After you have finished browsing samples, click the Browse button again
to quit the browsing mode.

To edit a requested sample run

1 Click the Browse button.


2 Click or until the desired sample is reached.

NOTE:
Click to go to the previous sample run.

Click to go to the next sample run.

3 Click the Edit button.

4-5
Advanced Operations

4 If you do not want to change the sample information, go directly to the


next step;
Otherwise, edit the sample information.

NOTE:
You can edit routine sample information here only if the
sample is in Requested status.
You cannot edit STAT sample information here because the
STAT sample is in Waiting status after it is requested.
Disk, ID and Replicates can’t be edited.
You can edit Sample and Bar code only at the Patient
Information screen. Refer to 4.3.3 Patient Info. for details.

5 If you do not want to change the tests for the sample, go directly to the
next step.
Otherwise, select tests and profiles in the Tests area or Profiles area.
If you want to add a test or a profile, select it; if you want to delete a test
or a profile, de-select it.

NOTE:
You can change the tests or profiles for the sample in any
status.
You can only delete a test or a profile for the sample in
Requested status.

6 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.
7 Repeat from step 2 to edit another sample run; or click the Browse button
again to quit the browsing mode.

To delete a sample run in Requested status

1 Click the Browse button.


2 Click or until the desired sample is reached.

NOTE:
Click to go to the previous sample run.

Click to go to the next sample run.

4-6
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Delete button to delete the selected sample.

NOTE:
You can only delete the routine sample that is in Requested
status here.
You cannot delete the STAT sample here because the STAT
sample is in Waiting status after it is requested. If you want
to delete a requested STAT sample, refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample
Disk tab or 4.1.4.3 Test Status tab for details.

4 Repeat from step 2 to delete another sample run; or click the Browse
button again to quit the browsing mode.

To exit the Request Sample Runs screen

1 Click the Close button.

4.1.2 Calibration

Click Routine → Calibration, or press F2, or click the short-cut button to


enter the Request Calibration Runs screen, as Figure4-2 shows.

Figure4-2 Request Calibration Runs screen

At the Request Calibration Runs screen, all the available tests are listed. The tests
followed by forbidden marks, such as , are those whose calibration
parameters have not been set yet and cannot be requested for calibrations. The
yellow-framed tests are the double-reagent tests whose reagent positions have
already been set. The gray-famed tests are the double-reagent tests whose reagent
positions have not been set yet. The selected test will be followed by a green tick.

4-7
Advanced Operations

You can select the desired sample disk (virtual disk) from the pull down list of the
Disk filed. The default sample disk is Sample Disk1. The adopted calibration rule
and calibrator will be displayed in the Rule and Calibrator fields respectively.

To request a calibration run

1 Click “▼” below Sample Disk and select the desired sample disk from the
pull down list.
2 Click the desired test to select it; click it again to de-select it. The select
test will be followed by a green tick. You can select multiple tests for a
calibration run.

3 Click the Request button to request a calibration run.


4 Repeat steps 1 - 3 to request another calibration run, or click the Close
button to exit the Request Calibration Runs screen.

CAUTION:
You must run the calibration if this is the first time the analyzer using
Endpoint or Fixed-time method for double-reagent tests. For the
Kinetic method, you can directly input the Factor without running the
calibration first (see 4.2.1.1 Parameters tab).
You need to run the calibration when you have changed the reagents,
reagent lots, test parameters, lamp or other analysis conditions.
Before calibrating a double-reagent test that uses Endpoint method,
the system will run reagent blank test for it automatically.

4.1.3 QC
Click Routine → QC, or press the F3 to enter the Request Reagent QC Runs
screen, as Figure4-3 shows. You can also enter the Request QC Runs screen by

clicking the short-cut button .

4-8
Advanced Operations

Figure4-3 Request QC Runs screen

The screen lists all available tests. The tests whose reagent positions have not been
set yet are followed by a forbidden symbol, such as , and you cannot
request to run them. The double-reagent tests, whose reagent positions have
already been set, are yellow-framed; the double-reagent tests, whose reagent
positions have not been set yet, are gray-framed. The selected test is followed by a
green tick.

When any test is selected, its corresponding control information will be displayed in
the Controls filed. The default sample disk (virtual disk) is disk 1 and you should
select the appropriate sample disk to the actual arrangement.

NOTE:
If the auto QC function is enabled (see 4.4.2.1 Routine Settings tab
for details) and the QC interval is not 0 (see 4.2.4.3 QC tab for
details), the analyzer will automatically insert QC runs among sample
runs and you do not have to request additional QC runs.

To request a QC run

1 Click “▼” below Sample Disk and select the desired sample disk from the
pull down list.

4-9
Advanced Operations

2 Click the desired test to select it; click it again to de-select it. The select
test will be followed by a green tick. You may select multiple tests for one
run.

3 Click the Request button to request a QC run.


4 Repeat steps 1 - 3 to request another QC run, or click the Close button to
exit the Request QC Runs screen.

4.1.4 Status
Click Routine → Status or press F4 to enter the Worklist Status screen, as Figure
4-4 shows. You can also enter the Worklist Status screen directly by clicking the

button.

Figure 4-4 Worklist Status screen

At the Worklist Status screen, you can see five tabs:

4-10
Advanced Operations

Sample Disk
Reaction Disk
Test Status
Calib. Status
QC Status

4.1.4.1 Sample Disk tab

The Sample Disk tab displays current status of the sample disk.

Figure 4-5 Sample disk tab

As Figure 4-5 shows the Sample Disk tab consists of three major parts, a sample
disk diagram on the left, sample information and tests on the right and operating
buttons on the bottom.

The sample disk diagram illustrates two circles. Every position consists of two
color-coded rings, the inner ring and the outer ring:

positions with blue inner rings represent routine samples;


positions with red inner rings represent STAT samples;
positions with pink inner rings represent controls;
positions with purple inner rings represent calibrators;
positions with dark green outer rings indicate the sample is in Requested status;
positions with orange outer rings indicate the sample is in Waiting status;
positions with green outer rings indicate the sample is in Running status ;
positions with blue outer rings indicate the sample is in Finished status;
positions with gray inner and outer rings represent unoccupied positions;
position W with brown inner rings represent reagent blanks;
position W with green inner and outer rings indicates there is no reagent blank.

4-11
Advanced Operations

To check information about a sample and its included tests

1 Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
field to check the corresponding sample and sample run information.
2 Click the desired position on the selected disk to check the corresponding
sample and its included tests.

To delete a sample in Requested or Waiting status

1 Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
field.
2 Click the desired position on the selected disk. Note that you can only
select a sample which test(s) is (are) all in Requested or Waiting status.
3 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

4 Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to cancel deletion.

To release a position (except for the control, calibrator positions


and position W) whose scheduled run has finished

1 Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
field.
2 Click the desired position on the selected disk. Note that you can only
select a sample which test(s) is (are) all in Finished status.
3 Click the Release button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to
confirm the release.

4 Click the OK button to confirm the release; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to cancel the release.

To release all the positions (except for the control, calibrator


positions and position W) whose scheduled run has finished

1 Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
field.

4-12
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Clear button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the clearing.

3 Click the OK button to confirm the clearing; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to cancel the clearing.

To re-run a sample

1 Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
field.
2 Click the desired position on the selected disk. Note that you can only
re-run a routine or STAT sample.
3 Select the test or tests need to be included in the re-run. Click the check
box to select it. Click the check box again to de-select it.

4 To re-run the selected sample without dilution, go directly to the next step;
to dilute the selected sample before the re-run, tick the Diluted field, and
then enter the appropriate sample volume and dilution ratio into the
Sample and Dilution fields respectively.

5 Click the Re-run button to request the selected sample again.

To check the reaction curve

1 Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
field.
2 Click the desired position on the selected disk to check the corresponding
sample and its included tests.
3 Click the desired test. Note that you can only select a Finished test.

4-13
Advanced Operations

4 Click the Reaction Curve to check the reaction curve and data of the
selected blank runs.

There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

5 If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve
window; or click the Return button and repeat from step 2.
6 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve window.

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

4.1.4.2 Reaction Disk tab

The Reaction Disk tab displays current status of the reaction disk.

4-14
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-6 Reaction Disk tab

As Figure 4-6 shows, the Reaction Disk tab consists of three major parts, a reaction
disk diagram on the left, test information, status and results on the right and
operating buttons on the bottom.

The reaction disk illustrates 80 reaction cuvette positions, all of which are
color-coded.

To check the parameter, status and results

1 Click the desired cuvette position and the corresponding parameters,


status and results (for finished runs) will be displayed on the right of the
screen.

To check the reaction curve and data

1 Click the desired cuvette in the reaction disk diagram. Note that you can
only check the reaction curve and data of the Finished runs.

4-15
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Reaction Curve to check the reaction curve and data of the
selected blank runs.

There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

3 If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve
window; or click the Return button and repeat from step 1.
4 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve window.

To command feeder to press segments

1 After loading the segments into the cuvette compartment, click the Load
Cuvette button to command the cuvette feeder to press the newly added
segments forward.

NOTE:
The Load Cuvette button is only to command the cuvette feeder to
press the cuvette segments forward.

4-16
Advanced Operations

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

4.1.4.3 Test Status tab

Figure 4-7 Test Status tab

As Figure 4-7 shows, the Test Status tab consists of the following tabs:

Sample Runs
Finished Patient Lists
Results

Sample Runs

The Sample Runs tab lists all the Requested, Waiting and Running samples of the
current day since the latest power-on.

4-17
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-8 Sample Runs tab

To view tests requested for a sample

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select a sample in the Samples field, then you can view the tests
requested for the selected sample.

To delete a sample in Requested or Waiting status

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.

4-18
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Delete button and the Delete Sample dialog box will pop up.

3 Select one or more samples in the Delete Sample dialog box.


Click the check box to the left of the sample to select it and click the box
again to de-select it.
Click the check box to the left of All to select all the displayed samples
and click the box again to de-select them.
4 Click the Delete button to delete the select samples. After that, you can
see the status of the samples changed to Deleted.
5 Click the Close button to close the Delete Sample dialog box.

NOTE:
In the Delete Sample dialog box, you can click the Refresh button to
view current samples in Requested or Waiting status.

To view or modify patient information

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select a sample in the Samples field.

3 Click the Patient Info. button to pop up the Patient Information dialog
box, and you can view or modify the patient information in the dialog box
(refer to 4.3.3 Patient Info. for details).

To view reaction curve of a finished test

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select a sample in the Samples field.

4-19
Advanced Operations

3 Select a test in the Done status in the Tests field.

4 Click the Reaction Curve button to pop up the Reaction Curve screen
that shows the reaction curve of the selected test.

There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

5 If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve
screen; or click the Return button and repeat from step 2.
6 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve window.

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

4-20
Advanced Operations

Finished Patient Lists tab

The Finished Patient Lists tab lists all the Finished samples of the current day
since the latest power-on. You can print patient reports and edit test results through
this tab.

Figure 4-9 Finished Patient Lists tab

To select certain samples

1 Click the Group Selection button. A dialog box will pop up.

2 Enter the number of the start sample into the first dialog box that pops up
and then click the OK button. A second dialog box will then pop up.

3 Enter the number of the end sample into the second dialog box that pops
up and click the OK button to select the two samples and those between
them.

4-21
Advanced Operations

To de-select certain samples

1 Click the Group Deletion button and a dialog box will pop up.

2 Enter the number of the start sample into the dialog box that pops up and
then click the OK button. Another dialog box will then pop up.

3 Enter the number of the end sample into the second dialog box that pops
up and click the OK button to de-select the two samples and those
between them.

To view reaction curve

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select a sample in the Samples field.

3 Select a test in the Tests field.

4-22
Advanced Operations

4 Click Reaction Curve to check the reaction curve and data of the
selected test.

There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

5 If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve
screen; or click the Return button and repeat from step 2.
6 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve screen.

To print out a patient report

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select the desired sample or samples in the Samples field. You can use
the Group Selection button or select them one by one.

4-23
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Print by Patient Button and a print preview window will pop up.

At the Print Preview window, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing)
for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current
page) or Pr. All (printing all pages) for other types of printers.

NOTE:
You can click (to the first page), (to the
previous page), (to the next page) or (to the
last page) to go to the desired page.
Pr. Current refers to printing the page currently displayed on
the screen.
Pr. All refers to printing all the pages of the selected sample
runs.

4 When the printing is done, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview
window.

To edit sample results

NOTE:
Sample results can only be edited by authorized personnel.

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.

4-24
Advanced Operations

2 Select a sample in the Samples field.

3 Select a test in the Tests field.

4 Click the Edit button.


5 Enter the new value in the edit box to the right of Result.

6 If you want to save the new results, click the Save button; otherwise, click
the Cancel button.

NOTE:
You can only edit sample results of the current day since the latest
power-on here.

To print daily summary

To print daily summary is to print out all the patient results of a certain day. You can
only use an impact printer for this purpose. Before printing, ensure the analyzer is
not doing anything related to an analysis.

1 Click the Print Daily Summary button and a dialog box will pop up to ask
you to confirm the printing.

2 Click the OK button to confirm the printing; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to abort the printing.
Once you click the OK button, another dialog box will pop up to ask you to
select a printer.

Click [OK] for an impact printer; click [Cancel] for others.

4-25
Advanced Operations

3 If the printer is not an impact one, click the Cancel button;


Otherwise, click the OK button and another dialog box will pop up to ask
you to enter the date of which the patient results you want to print.

4 Enter the date (the default is the current date) and click the OK button to
print out the patient results; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to
abort the printing.
If there is no result of the entered date, a dialog box will pop up to alert
you. Click the OK button to close the dialog box and abort the printing.

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

Results

The Results tab lists all the finished sample tests of the current day since the latest
power-on. You can print the test report and revise results through this tab..

Figure 4-10 Results tab

4-26
Advanced Operations

To select certain tests

1 Click the Group Selection button. A dialog box will pop up.

2 Enter the number of the start test into the first dialog box that pops up and
then click the OK button. A second dialog box will then pop up.

3 Enter the number of the end test into the second dialog box that pops up
and click the OK button to select the two tests and those between them.

To de-select certain tests

1 Click the Group Deletion button and a dialog box will pop up.

2 Enter the number of the start test into the dialog box that pops up and
then click the OK button. Another dialog box will then pop up.

3 Enter the number of the end test into the second dialog box that pops up
and click the OK button to de-select the two tests and those between
them.

To view reaction curve

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.

4-27
Advanced Operations

2 Select the desired test.

3 Click Reaction Curve to check the reaction curve and data of the
selected test.

There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

4 If you have no intention to view other results on the current virtual sample
disk, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve
screen; or click the Return button and repeat from step 2.
5 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve screen.

4-28
Advanced Operations

To print out a test report

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select the desired test or tests. You can use the Group Selection button
or select them one by one.
3 Click the Print Tests Button and a print preview window will pop up.

At the Print Preview window, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing)
for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current
page) or Pr. All (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
4 When the printing is done, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview
window.

To revise sample results

NOTE:
Sample results can only be revised by authorized personnel.
If you are not authorized to revise the results, a dialog box will pop up
to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.

1 Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.


2 Select a test or tests. You can use the Group Selection button or select
them one by one.

3 Click the Correct button.

4-29
Advanced Operations

4 Enter values in the edit boxes to the right of Factor a: and Factor b:.

5 If you want to revise the tests with the formula Y=aX+b (Y stands for the
new result and X stands for the old result), click the Save button;
otherwise, click the Cancel button.
After clicking the Save button, you can see the Test Results in the
Finished Tests field have been changed to the new ones.

NOTE:
You can only revise the sample results of the current day since the
latest power-on here.

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

4.1.4.4 Calib. Status tab

The Calib. Status tab lists the calibration runts of the current day since the latest
power-on.

Figure 4-11 Calib. Status tab

4-30
Advanced Operations

To view calibration test status

1 Select a calibration test in the Tests field. You can view the basic
information and the status of the selected test and the results of the
Finished tests.

To delete a Requested or Waiting calibration run

1 Select the desired calibration run in Requested or Waiting status. You can
only delete one run at a time.

2 Click the Delete button to delete the selected run.

To check reaction curve of calibration runs

1 Select a Finished calibration run in the Tests field.

2 Select a calibrator from the Calibration Status zone.

3 Click the Reaction Curve and a window will pop up to display the
corresponding reaction curve.

4-31
Advanced Operations

There are two tabs in the Reaction Curve screen: the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

4 Go directly to the next step if you have no intention to check other results;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button to view other results (not
only the results of calibrations) or click the Return button and then repeat
from step 1.
5 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve window.

To view calibration curve

1 Select a Finished calibration test in the Tests field.

4-32
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Calib. Curve button to display the calibration curve and the
calibration result.

To print the displayed curve and result, click the Print button.
3 Click the Return button to exit the Curve window.

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

4.1.4.5 QC Status tab

The QC Status tab lists the QC runs of the current day since the latest power-on.

Figure4-12 QC Status tab

4-33
Advanced Operations

To view status of QC run

1 Select a QC run in the Tests field. You can view the parameters and the
status of the selected run and the results of the Finished runs.

To view reaction curve of QC runs

1 Select a finished QC run from the Tests field.

2 Select a control from the QC Status field.

3 Click the Reaction Curve and a window will pop up to display the
corresponding reaction curve.

There are two tabs in the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

4-34
Advanced Operations

4 Go directly to the next step if you have no intention to check other results;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button to view other results (not
only the results of QCs) or click the Return button and then repeat from
step 1.
5 Click the Return button to close the Reactive Curve window.

To delete a requested QC run

1 Select the desired Requested QC run. You can only delete one run at a
time.

2 Click the Delete button to delete the selected run.

To exit the Worklist Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Worklist Status screen.

4.1.5 Start
Start is used to run the requested tests.

If the current tests are paused, Start will change to Resume that is used to continue
the paused tests.

4-35
Advanced Operations

Start tests

1
Click Routine → Start or press F5, or click the short-cut button to
pop up the following dialog box.

2 In the Sample dialog box, select a virtual sample disk to the right of
Sample Disk.

NOTE:
If there are any requested STAT samples on the current
default virtual sample disk, you can only select the disk.

3 In the Sample dialog box, select samples to be run in the Please select
the samples you need to run field.
If you select All, go directly to the step 5; if you select Partial, go to the
next step.

NOTE:
If you select All, the system will run all the Requested
samples (Waiting STAT samples included), calibrations and
QC tests.
If you select Partial, the system will run some Requested
samples, calibrations and QC tests. When Partial is
selected, the Sample field is available.

4-36
Advanced Operations

4 In the Sample dialog box, select tests to be run in the Sample field.

If you want to run sample tests, select the check box to the left of Sample
ID and enter the sample ID in the edit boxes to the right of it. The system
will run the Requested samples whose IDs are between the two numbers
(including the two numbers).
If you want to run calibration tests, select the check box to the left of
Calibration and select tests below it.
If you want to run QC tests, select the check box to left of QC and select
tests below it.
5 If you want to continue, click the OK button; otherwise, click the Cancel
button.
When you click the OK button, a dialog box will pop up.

6 Select a virtual reagent disk in the Select Reagent Disk dialog box.
7 If you want to run the selected tests, click the OK button; otherwise, click
the Cancel button and the system will not run the selected tests.
When you click the OK button, the status of the selected tests changes to
Waiting and the system will run the tests which use the reagents on the
selected virtual disk immediately.

4-37
Advanced Operations

NOTE:
If the system finishes the tests that use the reagents on the selected
virtual reagent disk, and there are waiting tests which use reagents on
the other disk, a dialog box will pop up.

Click the OK button to exit the dialog box.


After replacing the reagent disk, click the Resume button to continue
the tests that use reagents on the other disk. Refer to the following
contents for details.

Resume tests

1 When the system is paused, click Routine → Resume or press F5, or

click the short-cut button to continue the tests. The system will
take different operations according to different conditions. Refer to the
following steps for details.
2 If there is no test in Requested status and no need to replace the reagent
disk, the system will continue the tests directly.
3 If there is no test in Requested status but you need to replace the reagent
disk, the following dialog box will pop up.

After selecting a virtual reagent disk in the dialog box, click OK to


continue the tests or click Cancel to abort running.

4-38
Advanced Operations

4 If there are tests in Requested status, the following dialog box will pop up.

If you want to continue the tests currently being paused, click Cancel
button;
If you want not only to continue the tests currently being paused but also
to run the tests in Requested status, select tests and click the OK button.
After that, if there is no need to replace the reagent disk, the system will
continue the tests; if you want to replace the reagent disk, a dialog box
will pop up.

After selecting a virtual reagent disk in the dialog box, click OK to


continue the tests or click Cancel to abort running.

4.1.6 Probe Stop

Click Routine → Probe Stop, or press F6, or click the short-cut button to
stop the sample and reagent probes and the mixing bar without stopping the reaction
disk. You may use this function to add more samples or reagents without stopping
the analysis. This menu is only functional when the system is testing.

NOTE:
Do not put the probes and the bar on hold for too long. Otherwise,
certain analyses may be affected.

4-39
Advanced Operations

4.1.7 Stop

Click Routine → Stop, or press F8, or click the short-cut button to stop the

current run. This menu is only functional when the system is testing.

NOTE:
Mindray recommends this stop function not be used unless it is
necessary (for instance the analyzer is experiencing problems). When
the analyzer is experiencing a serious problem, the analyzer will be
stopped automatically.
After the analyzer is stopped, all the remaining runs will be invalidated
and return to the Requested status, but the finished runs will be

saved. To continue these runs, click the short-cut button .

4.1.8 Exit
When you have finished all analyses and the system is in the idle status, click

Routine → Exit, or press F10, or to click the short-cut button to exit the
control system. A dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the exiting operation.

Click the OK button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to load detergents.

NOTE:
Please use the Mindray-recommended detergents: 0.1mol/l
hydrochloric acid, or 0.5% (V/V) Javel water.
Use of other detergents may lead to inaccurate results. Do not use
other detergents.

4-40
Advanced Operations

Ensure acid and alkaline detergents are loaded to positions 45 and 47 respectively
and then click the OK button and the analyzer will start the following shutdown
procedure:

1 Backs up the data in database and unloads the used cuvettes.


2 Carries out the washing procedure: washing the sample probe, reagent
probe and mixing bar for three times respectively with the acid and alkaline
detergents.
3 Washes the analyzing unit with deionized water as defined by Auto
washing during startup/shutdown at the Test Settings screen.
4 Unloads the first cuvette segment.

When the shutdown procedure is done, a dialog box will pop up to remind you that
you can shutdown the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF safely. Click the OK
button to exit the control software.

4.1.9 Emergency Exit


When the analyzer is experiencing a serious problem, you need to click Routine →
Emergency Exit, or press CTRL+F12 to exit the control system without doing the
shutdown procedure.

NOTE:
Use this emergency exit function only when the analyzer is
experiencing a serious problem.

4.2 Parameters

Parameters Tests

Reagents

Calibration

QC

4.2.1 Tests
The Tests screen is where you set parameters regarding the tests, calculation tests,
profiles, carryover and manual tests.

To enter the Tests screen, click Parameters → Tests, or press the F11 key on the
keyboard.

4-41
Advanced Operations

NOTE:
If you are not authorized to edit the test parameters, a dialog box will
pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.

Figure 4-13 Tests screen

At the Tests screen, shown in Figure 4-13, you can see the following tabs:

Parameters
Expected
Calculation
Profile
Carryover
Manual Test

Follow the instructions given below to set them.

4-42
Advanced Operations

4.2.1.1 Parameters tab

Figure 4-14 Parameters tab

The Parameters tab consists of three main parts, the upper part being the
parameters to be set for the selected test, the middle part being all the tests whose
parameters are set already, the lower part being the operating buttons.

In the middle part, yellow-framed tests are the double-reagent tests whose reagent
positions are set already; the gray-framed tests are the double-reagent tests whose
reagent positions are not set yet; the non-framed tests are the single-reagent tests.

Follow the instructions given below to set the parameters for the selected test.

Parameter What it does How to set


No. It is the system-generated number It is system-generated and
assigned to the current test. you can’t set it.
Test Defines the identification of the test Enter maximum 20 letters,
to be set. digits for the identification.
Method Defines the analysis method to be Select one of the three
used on the current test. listed methods: Endpoint,
Fixed time and Kinetic,
from the pull-down list.
Direction Defines how the absorbance Select Ascend or Descend
changes during the reaction from the pull-down list.
process, ascends (the absorbance
increasing with the reaction) or
descends (the absorbance
decreasing with the reaction).
Unit Defines the unit in which the test Select the desired unit from
result is to be expressed. the pull-down list.

4-43
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


Decimals Defines the decimal places of the Enter the desired integer
test result. (0-5) into the edit box to the
right of Decimals; or click
on the right of the edit
box until the desired integer
is reached.
Prim. Wav. Defines the primary wavelength to Select one of the seven
be used on the test. wavelengths (340, 405,
450, 510, 546, 578, 630,
670 and 700) from the
pull-down list.
Sec. Wav. Defines the secondary wavelength Select one of the seven
to be used on the test. wavelengths (340, 405,
450, 510, 546, 578, 630,
670 and 700) from the
pull-down list.
Sample Defines the sample volume Enter the desired number
Vol. (3-45µl) to be dispensed for the (must be the multiple of 0.5)
reaction. into the edit box to the right
of Sample Vol.; or click
on the right of the edit box
until the desired number is
reached.
R1 Vol. Defines the volume (180-450 µl) of Enter the desired integer
the first reagent to be dispensed (180-450) into the edit box
for the reaction. to the right of R1 Vol..
Note the entered Sample
Vol. + R1 Vol. must be
183µl -500µl.
R2 Vol. Defines the volume (30-450 µl) of Enter the desired integer
the second reagent to be (30-450) into the edit box to
dispensed for the reaction. the right of R2 Vol..
Note the entered Sample
Vol. + R1 Vol. + R2 Vol.
must be 183µl -500µl.
Line Limit Applies to the Kinetic type only. It Enter the desired value
ranges from 1 to 10 and the default (1-100) into the edit box.
value is 20.
The analyzer will automatically
calculate the linearity within the
measurement time and compare
the result to the line limit and flag
the result exceeding the defined
limit.
The formula to calculate the
linearity is as follows:
(1)When more than 9 points are
measured
Linearity = (absorbance change of
the first 6 points – absorbance
change of the last 6

4-44
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


points)/(absorbance change of all
the points)
(2)When the 4 ≤number of
measured points ≤8
Linearity = (absorbance change of
the first 3 points – absorbance
change of the last 3
points)/(absorbance change of all
the points)
Incubation Applies only to double-reagent Enter the desired integer
tests. (1-60) into the edit box to
the right of Incubation.
Defines the interval (counted in
periods. One period equals 12
seconds) between the point the
sample is dispensed and the point
the second reagent is dispensed.
Reaction Defines the reaction time (counted Find the corresponding
in periods. One period equals 12 integers listed on the
seconds). For the Endpoint instructions of the reagent
method, the reaction time refers to and enter them into the edit
the interval between the start of the boxes to the right of
reaction and the end of the Reaction.
reaction; for the Kinetic or Fixed
time method, the reaction time Enter the start time into the
refers to the interval between the first box. For the
point when the reaction becomes single-reagent test to be
stabilized and the point when the analyzed by the Endpoint
reaction is no longer monitored. method, the start time is 0;
For the double-reagent test
The entered integers must be no to be analyzed by the
less than -40 and no greater than Endpoint method, the start
100. time can be negative
(-incubation time-100); For
The BS-300 defines the start time any test to be analyzed by
of the reaction as 0. For the the Kinetic or Fixed time
single-reagent test the start time method, the start time must
refers to the point when the sample be positive.
is dispensed; For the
double-reagent test, the start time Enter the end time, which is
refers to the point when the second no less than 0 and no
reagent is dispensed. greater 100, into the
second box. The end time
must be greater than the
start time. For any test to be
analyzed by the Kinetic
method, the end time must
be greater than the start
time 7 at least.
Antigen Defines whether the analyzer Click the check box to the
should check for surplus antigen. right of Antigen to enable
the check; Click it again to
When the antibody reacts with the disable the check.
antigen, the amount of the product
is closely related to their
proportion. Only the appropriate
proportion can introduce the

4-45
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


maximum amount of the product
and when this happens, the
transmitted light is minimized and
the largest absorbance is obtained.
Any other proportion will lead to a
less absorbance and when this
happens, samples of significantly
different antigen concentrations
may have the same test results.
The surplus antigen threshold
(Antigen) refers to the maximum
or minimum PC when there is no
surplus antigen.

It only applies to the Endpoint tests


to be analyzed using the
antigen-antibody reaction. When
1/3 of the reaction time has
elapsed, at least 80% of the
reaction should be finished.
Otherwise, there is surplus antigen.

Calculation:

(1)For the calibrator of the


maximum concentration:

threshold = 2*(absorbance of the


last point - absorbance taken at 1/3
reaction time) / (absorbance of the
last point + absorbance taken at
1/3 reaction time)
(2)The above formula applies to
samples(including controls) as well
(3)For a descending reaction, if:

the calculated threshold of the


sample (including controls) is less
than that of the
maximum-concentration calibrator,
and
the absorbance of the last point of
the sample (including controls) is
greater than that of the
maximum-concentration calibrator
then there is surplus antigen.
(4)For a ascending reaction, if :
the calculated threshold of the
sample (including controls) is
greater than that of the
maximum-concentration calibrator,
and
the absorbance of the last point of
the sample (including controls) is
less than that of the

4-46
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


maximum-concentration calibrator
then there is surplus antigen.
Substrate Defines whether the analyzer Enter the desired number
should check for surplus substrate (0-2.5). When the entered
and applies only to the Kinetic and number is 0, the analyzer
Fixed time method. does not check for surplus
substrate.
Certain highly concentrated
(active) sample may consume the
substrate shortly. When it happens,
the reaction is no longer a 0th-order
(kinetic) or first-order (fixed-time)
one, which may lead to wrong
results. This parameter is defined
to prevent that from happening. It
refers to the absorbance
corresponding to the critical point
of the linear and non-linear regions
(for the Kinetic) or of the first-order
and multiple-order regions. It is the
minimum (descending curve) or
maximum (ascending curve)
absorbance within the given
reaction time and there is still
substrate left.
Response Defines allowed maximum (for Find the corresponding
ascending reaction) or minimum values on the instructions of
(for descending reaction) the reagent and enter them
absorbance (for the Endpoint respectively to the edit
method) or absorbance change boxes to the right of Lower
rate (for other methods). and Upper in the
Response field.
Enter 0s into both the edit
boxes if there is no
restriction on the response.
Full Name Defines the full name of the current Enter maximum 60 letters,
test. digits and/or symbols into
the edit box to the right of
Full Name.
Print No. Defines a printing number for the Enter the desired integer
current test. into the edit box to the right
of Print No..
R1 Blank Defines the allowed absorbance Find the corresponding
range of the R1 blank (R1 refers to values on the instructions of
the reagent of a single-reagent test the reagent and enter them
or the first reagent of the into the edit boxes to the
double-reagent test). The analyzer right of Lower and Upper
will flag the blank result that is in the R1 Blank field.
beyond the defined range.
Entering 0s into both the
edit boxes means there is
no need to check the R1
blank.

4-47
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


Mix. R. Defines the allowed absorbance Find corresponding values
Blank range of the mixture (reagents + on the instruction of the
sample) of the double-reagent test. reagent and enter them into
The analyzer will flag the blank the edit boxes to the right of
result that is beyond the defined Lower and Upper in the
range. Mix. R. Blank field.
Entering 0s into both the
edit boxes means there is
no need to check the
reagent blank of the
mixture.
Linearity Defines the range in which the Find the corresponding
reaction result is linear with the values on the instructions of
response (R). The analyzer will the reagent and enter them
flag the blank result that is beyond into the edit boxes to the
the defined range. right of Lower and Upper
in the Linearity field.
Entering 0s into both the
edit boxes means there is
no need to check the
linearity.
Factor Defines the calculation factor and Find the corresponding
applies only to the test to be value on the instructions of
analyzed by the Kinetic method. the reagent (optical path
For the test with a pre-set being 10mm) and enter it
calculation factor, you can directly into the edit boxes to the
run it without running the right of Factor.
calibration first.
Speed Applies to the tests of the Kinetic Enter the desired integer
type only. into the edit box to the right
of Speed.
If the absorbance change in the
unit time is less than the entered
value, the analyzer will
automatically extend the
measurement time to 360s (30
periods)

NOTE:
Please define the parameters as instructed by this operation manual
and the instructions of the reagent suppliers. Improper settings may
lead to unreliable test results.

To view the parameters of a specific test

1 Go to the middle part of the tab and click the desired test and then the
upper part will show the parameters of the specific test.

4-48
Advanced Operations

To add a new test

1 Click the Add button.


2 Enter the parameters as instructed by the instruction of the reagents.
3 Click the Save button to save the setting; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the setting.

NOTE:
If there are any obligatory parameters missing, once you
click the Save button, the analyzer will automatically
red-frame the missing parameters (or pops up a dialog box
to warning you about it) and disables the Save button. You
need to set the missing parameters and try to save the
settings again.

To delete a test

1 Go to the middle part of the tab and click the desired test.

2 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

3 Click the YES button to delete the test; click the NO button, for any
reason, to ignore the deletion.

NOTE:
Once you have confirmed to delete the selected test, the
analyzer will delete all the parameters, including the reagent
parameters, calibration parameters, and QC parameters,
related to the test. Ensure the right test is selected before
confirming the deletion.

4-49
Advanced Operations

To edit a test

1 Go to the middle part of the tab and click the desired test.

2 Click the Edit button.


3 Go back to the upper part of the tab to edit the test as you need.
4 Click the Save button to save the change; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the change.
Once you have clicked the Save button, if the changed parameters
change analysis conditions, a dialog box will pop up to remind you to
re-calibrate. Click the OK button. If the changed parameters do not
change analysis conditions, this dialog box will not pop up.

A dialog box will pop up to ask you whether to delete other parameters
related to this test.

If you click the Yes button, the analyzer will save the changed
parameters and clear all other unchanged ones, including the
corresponding reagent parameters, calibration parameters, and QC
parameters; if you click the No button, the analyzer will save the
changed parameters and keep the other related parameters unchanged.

NOTE:
Once you have clicked the Yes button, the analyzer will
delete all the parameters, including the reagent parameters,
calibration parameters, and QC parameters, related to the
test. Ensure the right test is selected before confirming the
deletion.

To exit the Tests screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Tests screen.

4-50
Advanced Operations

4.2.1.2 Expected tab

Figure 4-15 Expected tab

Click the Expected tab to edit or view the expected means of the test, as Figure
4-15 shows.

Parameter What it does How to set


Test Selects the test to be Directly select the desired test from
set. the pull down list or click (to
check the previous test) or
button (to check the next test) until the
desired test is found.
Sample Type Defines to which Select one of the following four types
type the sample from the pull down list: Serum,
belongs. Plasm, Urine and Others.
Gender Defines the gender Select one of the following four types
of the patient. from the pull down list: Male, Female,
Others and blank.
Patient Defines expected Tick the patient group sequentially
Demographics means for patients of from No.1 and enter the desired year
(Figure 4-16) different ages. and month in the Year and Month
Maximum 6 patient columns to define the upper and lower
groups can be limits of the patient ages. Enter the
defined. desired upper and lower limits for the
age groups. You must not leave the
any box blank.
The first Year box is for the lower limit
of the age and the second Year box is
for the upper limit. Both the entered
values must be 0-150 and the upper
limit must be greater than or equal to
the lower limit.

4-51
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


For adult or paediatric patients older
than one year, you can only enter 0s
to both the Month boxes. In case of
patients younger than one year, enter
the lower limit into the first Month and
the upper limit into the Month limit.
Both the entered values must be 0-12
and the upper limit must be greater
than or equal to the lower limit.
Default (Figure For a given test and Enter the lower limit into the first box
4-17) sample type and and the upper limit into the second.
patient gender, You can leave either of the boxes, but
defines the expected not both the boxes, empty. If you
range of the test entered values into both the boxes,
results for patients of ensure that 0 ≤ lower limit <upper
all ages. limit.
The expected range
defined for a
particular patient
group supersedes
this default range.

Figure 4-16 Patient demographics

Figure 4-17 Setting default expected range

To view the expected means

1 Click “▼” to the right of Test and select the desired test from the pull
down list.
2 Click “▼” to the right of Sample Type and select the desired type from the
pull down list.

4-52
Advanced Operations

3 Click “▼” to the right of Gender and select the desired gender from the
pull down list.
The pre-set expected means will then be displayed.

To set expected means

1 Click “▼” to the right of Test and select the desired test from the pull
down list.
2 Click “▼” to the right of Sample Type and select the desired type from the
pull down list.
3 Click “▼” to the right of Gender and select the desired gender from the
pull down list.
4 Click the Setup button.
5 Tick the check box of the first patient group and set the Years, Months,
Lower and Upper field as instructed above.
6 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

NOTE:
In case of inappropriate settings, a dialog box will pop up to
alert you once you have clicked the Save button.

To exit the Tests screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Tests screen.

4.2.1.3 Calculation tab

Calculate certain tests to derive certain new tests of clinical purpose, such as A/G,
TBil-DBil and so forth.

The Calculated tab is where you set the parameters related to such calculation.

4-53
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-18 Calculation tab

As Figure 4-18 shows, the Calculation tab consists of four major parts: the
parameters on the upper left, all the available tests on the upper right, calculation
formula on the middle and operating buttons on the bottom.

The parameters are interpreted as follows.

Parameter What it does How to set


No. Assigns a Use the system-generated
system-generated number number.
to the current calculated
test.
Test Defines the name of the Enter the desired name
test. (maximum 20 letters) into
the edit box.
Unit Selects one of the units Select the desired unit from
for the test. the pull down list.
Decimals Defines how many Enter the desired integer or
decimal places (0 - 6) the click the button until the
test result should have. desired number is reached.
Reference Defines the expected Enter the lower limit into the
range of the test result. first edit box and the upper
into the second. If you enter
0s into both the boxes, it
means no specific range
defined for the test result.
Full Name Defines full name of the Enter maximum 60 letters
test. into the edit box.
Print No. Defines the user-assigned Enter the desired integer
printing order. into the edit box.

4-54
Advanced Operations

To check the parameters of a calculated test

1 Select the desire test from the Tests field, or click or until
the desired test is reached.

NOTE:
Click to go to the previous test.

Click to go to the last test.

The related parameters will be displayed on the screen.

Add a new calculated test

1 Click the Add button.


2 Enter the related parameters as instructed above.

3 Select the tests to be involved in the calculation from the Tests field.

4-55
Advanced Operations

4 Click the Add to list button to add the selected tests to the calculation list.

NOTE:
In case you add inappropriate tests to the calculation list by
mistake, click the Clear button to clear the list and then
re-select appropriate tests to add to the list.

5 Edit the calculation formula by clicking a selected test from the calculation
list and click the Add to formula button to add the test to the Edit formula
field. Clicking the digit buttons (0-9) and operator buttons (+, -, and so
forth) to associate the test with appropriated digits and operators as
needed by the desired calculation formula. Repeat this step on every
selected test until the desired calculation formula is completed.

NOTE:
To clear a mistake, click the Clear Formula button to clear
the formula and re-edit it the right way.

Example: to edit TP_KH - ALB_KH, first select TP_KH from the


calculation list and then click the Add to formula button to add the test to
the Edit formula field. Click the – button to associate the TP_KH with the
minus sign. Select ALB_KH from the calculation list and click the Add to
formula button to add the test to the Edit formula field, following the
minus sign. Thus, the desired formula is completed.

6 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

To delete a calculated test

1 Select the test to delete from the pull down list on the middle left of the
screen.

4-56
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion; click the No button, for any
reason, to cancel the deletion.

To edit a calculated test

1 Select the test to edit from the pull down list on the middle left of the
screen.
2 Edit the formula as needed.

NOTE:
In case you add inappropriate tests to the calculation list by
mistake, click the Clear button to clear the list and then
re-select appropriate tests to add to the list.
To clear a mistake, click the Clear Formula button to clear
the formula and re-edit it the right way.

3 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

To exit the Tests screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Tests screen.

4.2.1.4 Profile tab

Tests grouped together for certain clinical purpose (for instance liver function)
constitute a profile.

4-57
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-19 Profile tab

As the figure shows, the Profile tab consists of three major parts: existing profiles
(groups) on the left, available tests (tests have no assigned reagent positions are
followed by a forbidden mark) on the right and operating buttons on the bottom.

To check the tests included in a profile (group)

1 Select the desired group from the pull down list of the Group Name field
or from the Group List field. The included tests will be followed a green
tick.

To add a new profile

1 Click the Add button.


2 Enter an appropriate profile name into the edit box of the Group Name
field.
3 Select the tests to be included. The selected tests will be followed by a
green tick. Clicking the ticked test again may de-select the test.

4 Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the settings.

4-58
Advanced Operations

To delete a profile

1 Select the desired group from the pull down list of the Group Name field
or from the Group List field.

2 Click the Delete button to delete the selected profile.

3 Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to cancel the deletion.

To edit a profile

1 Select the desired group from the pull down list of the Group Name field
or from the Group List field.
2 Click the Edit button.
3 Select or de-select the tests as you need. The selected tests will be
followed by a green tick. Clicking the ticked test again may de-select the
test.
4 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

To exit the Tests screen

1 Click the Close to exit the Tests screen.

4.2.1.5 Carryover tab

Various reagents are sampled by the reagent probe and carryover between the
adjacent reagents, though minimized by the washing process, is still a factor to be
taken into account. This carryover may impose serious effect on certain reagents
and consequently on the related test results. This Carryover tab is designed so that
you can minimize this effect by keeping the tests whose reagents may affect each
other as far away from each other as possible, or, if this is not an option, ordering
extra probe washing before analyzing those tests.

4-59
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-20 Carryover tab

As the figure shows, the Carryover Parameters screen consists of three major parts:
current reagents listed in the Current field on the upper, the reagents that may be
affected (contaminated) by the current reagents listed in the Contaminated field on
the lower, and operating buttons on the bottom.

Note that the yellow reagents are the first reagents of the double-reagent tests and
the blue reagents are the second reagents of the double-reagent tests.

To check the carryover parameters

1 Click the desired reagent from the Current field and the selected reagent
will be followed by a green tick. Check the Contaminated field and the
tests followed by a red tick are those that may be affected by the current
reagent.

To set the carryover parameters for a reagent

1 Click the Setup button.


2 Select the desired reagent from the Current field. The selected reagent
will be followed by a green tick. Clicking the ticked reagent again may
de-select it.
3 Check the Contaminated field and click the reagents that may be
affected by the current test. The selected reagent will be followed by a red
tick. Clicking the ticked reagent again may de-select it.
4 Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the settings.

4-60
Advanced Operations

To clear the carryover settings of a reagent

1 Click the desired reagent from the Current field and the selected reagent
will be followed by a green tick. Check the Contaminated field and the
tests followed by a red tick are those that may be affected by the current
reagent.
2 Click the Clear button and you will see all the red ticks have disappeared.

To exit the Tests screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Tests screen.

4.2.1.6 Manual Test tab

All the tests that are not run by the BS-300 are referred to as the manual tests, given
you have to manually enter the test results into the analyzer if you want to use it to
print out the results.

You can set basic information of manual tests at the Manual Test tab. Refer to
4.3.4.1 Test Data tab for details regarding entering the test results manually.

Figure 4-21 Manual Test tab

As the figure shows, the Manual Test tab consists of mainly three parts: the
parameters on the upper left, the tests on the upper right and the operating buttons
on the bottom.

The parameters are interpreted as follows.

Parameter What it does How to set


No. Assigns a system-generated Use the system-generated
number to the current number.
calculated test.

4-61
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


Test Defines the name of the test. Enter the desired name
(maximum 20 letters) into the
edit box.
Decimals Defines how many decimal Enter the desired integer or click
places (0 - 6) the test result the button until the desired
should have. number is reached.
Unit Selects one of the units for Select the desired unit from the
the test. pull down list.
Lower Limit Defines the lower limit of the Enter the desired into the edit
expected range of the test box.
result.
If you enter 0s for both the lower
and upper limits, it means no
specific range defined for the
test result.
Upper Limit Defines the upper limit of the Enter the desired into the edit
expected range of the test box.
result.
If you enter 0s for both the lower
and upper limits, it means no
specific range defined for the
test result.
Print No. Defines the user-assigned Enter the desired integer into
printing order. the edit box.
Full Name Defines full name of the test. Enter maximum 60 letters into
the edit box.

To check the parameters of a manual test

1 Select the desire test from the test list and its parameters will be displayed
on the screen.

To add a new manual test

1 Click the Add button.


2 Enter the parameters.
3 Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the settings.

4-62
Advanced Operations

To delete a manual test

1 Select the desire test from the test list.

2 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

3 Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to cancel the deletion.

To edit a manual test

1 Select the desired test from test list.

2 Click the Edit button.


3 Edit its parameters as needed.
4 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

To exit the Tests screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Tests screen.

4.2.2 Reagents
To enter the Reagents screen, click Parameters → Reagents, or press F12.

NOTE:
If you are not authorized to change the reagent parameters, a dialog
box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and
password.

4-63
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-22 Reagents screen

At the Reagents screen, Figure 4-22, you can see two tabs:

Reagent Disk
Leftover

The Reagents Disk tab is where you set the parameters regarding the reagents.
The Leftover tab is where you check the remaining reagents and print the checking
results.

4.2.2.1 Reagent Disk tab

Click the Reagent Disk tab to edit or view the reagent disk status, as Figure 4-23
shows.

4-64
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-23 Reagent Disk tab

There are two virtual reagent disks, disk 1 and disk 2.

As the reagent disk diagram shows, the reagent disk has 50 reagent positions, 25 on
the inner circle and marked even number and another 25 on the outer circle and
marked odd numbers.

All the reagent positions are color-coded: white for the empty positions; green for the
positions occupied by reagents for the single-reagent tests; red for the positions
occupied by reagents for the double-reagent tests; blue for the positions (49 and 50)
occupied by distilled water. Note that you cannot use the two blue positions for other
purposes.

The list to the right of the reagent disk diagram displays all the tests that have been
set.

The reagent parameters are interpreted as follows.

Parameter What it does


Reag. Disk Displays the current virtual reagent disk.
R1 Defines the position for reagent 1.
R2 Defines the position for reagent 2. Note that this parameter is
not available for single-reagent tests.
R1 Leftover Uses a color bar to display how much reagent left in the R1
bottle. The color can represent maximum 100ml of the reagent.
When the remaining reagent is still more than half of the bottle,
the color bar appears green; When the remaining reagent is
between 1/4 and 1/2 of the bottle, the color bar appears yellow;
When the remaining reagent is less than 1/4 of the bottle, and
the color bar appears red.
The box to the right of the color bar displays how many tests
the remaining reagent is enough for.

4-65
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does


R2 Leftover Uses a color bar to display how much reagent left in the R2
bottle. The color can represent maximum 100ml of the reagent.
When the remaining reagent is still more than half of the bottle,
the color bar appears green; When the remaining reagent is
between 1/4 and 1/2 of the bottle, the color bar appears yellow;
When the remaining reagent is less than 1/4 of the bottle, and
the color bar appears red.
The box to the right of the color bar displays how many tests
the remaining reagent is enough for.
R1 Bottle Defines the bottle used by reagent 1.
R2 Bottle Defines the bottle used by reagent 2. Note that this parameter
is not available for single-reagent tests.

To view the reagent parameters of a specific test

1 Click “▼” to the right of Reag. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent
disk from the pull down list.
2 Click the desired test in the test list.

To view the reagent parameters of a specific reagent position

1 Click “▼” to the right of Reag. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent
disk from the pull down list.
2 Click the desired position in the reagent disk diagram.

To set reagent parameters for a new test

1 Click “▼” to the right of Reag. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent
disk from the pull down list. The positions of the reagents will be set on
the selected virtual reagent disk.
2 Click the desired test from the test list.

3 Click the Setup button.


4 Click “▼” to the right of R1 Bottle or R2 Bottle and select the desired
bottle from the pull down list. Note that for the single-reagent test, you
cannot select R2 Bottle.
5 Click “▼” to the right of R1 or R2 and select the desired position from the
pull down list. Note that for the single-reagent test, you cannot select R2
position.

4-66
Advanced Operations

6 Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the settings.

NOTE:
When you have set (not changed) the reagent position for a
test, the analyzer will automatically take the reagent bottle
volume as the volume of the remaining reagent.
If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you
about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save
button.

To clear the reagent positions set for a test

1 Click “▼” to the right of Reag. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent
disk from the pull down list.
2 Select the desired test from the test list.

3 Click the Clear button to clear the reagent positions set for the selected
test.

NOTE:
Once you have clicked the Clear button, the analyzer will
immediately clear all the reagent positions set for the
selected test without asking you to confirm the clearing.
Ensure the right test is selected before clicking the Clear
button.

To change reagent parameters set for a test

1 Click “▼” to the right of Reag. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent
disk from the pull down list.
2 Select a test.

4-67
Advanced Operations

3 If the new positions for the selected test are on the current virtual reagent
disk, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Clear button and then select the other virtual reagent
disk to the right of Reag. Disk.
4 Click the Setup button.
5 Select the bottle types to the right of R1 Bottle and R2 Bottle for the
reagents. For the single reagent test, R2 Bottle is unavailable.
6 Select the positions to the right of R1 and R2 for the reagents. For the
single reagent test, R2 is unavailable.
7 If you want to save the settings, click the Save button; otherwise, click the
Cancel button.

NOTE:
If some parameters are not set correctly, after you click the
Save button, the system will remind you.

To set the default reagent disk

1 Click the Def. Reag. Disk button to pop up the following dialog box.

2 Select a virtual reagent disk in the dialog box.


3 If you want to set the selected disk as the default reagent disk, click the
OK button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
After you set the default reagent disk, the Reagent Disk tab and the
Leftover tab will display its reagent information.

To exit the Reagents screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Reagents screen.

4.2.2.2 Leftover tab

Click the Leftover tab to check the remaining reagents and print the checking results,
as Figure 4-24 shows.

4-68
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-24 Leftover tab

To check remaining reagents

NOTE:
Ensure you have opened the reagent bottles before checking the
remaining reagents.

1 Click the Reag. Disk tab, and then click the “▼” to the right of Reag. Disk
and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list. Refer to
4.2.2.1 Reagent Disk tab for details.
2 To select one reagent, click the desired reagent;
to select multiple discontinued reagents, press and hold CTRL and click
the desired reagents one by one;
to select multiple continue reagents, click the first reagent of the desired
ones then press and hold SHIFT and click the last reagent of the desired
ones.

4-69
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Check Leftover button to view how much reagent is left in the
selected bottle and how many tests the remaining reagent is enough for.

To print out the remaining reagents

1 Click the Print button to print the currently displayed reagent leftover
information.

4.2.3 Calibration
The Calibration screen is where you set the parameters regarding calibrators and
calibrations and view the calibration results.

To enter the Calibration screen, click Parameters → Calibration, or press CTRL +


K.

NOTE:
If you are not authorized to edit the calibration parameters, a dialog
box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and
password.

Figure 4-25 Calibration screen

At the Calibration screen, Figure 4-25, you can see the following tabs:

Calibrator
Calibration
Calib. Data

4.2.3.1 Calibrator tab

The Calibrator tab is where you set parameters of the calibrators.


4-70
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-26 Calibrator tab

Click the Calibrator tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-26 shows. The tab
consists of 4 zones:

Calibrators zone – displays such calibrator parameters as lot number,


expiration date, etc.
Positions zone (Figure 4-27) – displays the positions of the calibrators.
Tests included zone – displays tests that related to the selected calibrator in
Calibrators zone.
Operating buttons – such buttons as Add, Edit, etc.

Figure 4-27 Calibrator positions

Five virtual sample disks (Disk1 - Disk5) are displayed in the Positions zone and
every virtual disk has 6 calibrator positions (S1 - S6). The 0 position (default) means
this virtual disk has no position set for the calibrator yet. You cannot request a
calibration run for a calibrator whose corresponding calibrator positions on all the five
virtual disks are 0s.

4-71
Advanced Operations

To view positions and tests of a specific calibrator

1 Click the desired calibrator in the Calibrators zone and check its
positions and tests in the Positions and Tests included zones
respectively.

To add a new calibrator

1 Click the Add button and an Attribute window will pop up.

2 The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new calibrator and
you can only view in the No. field without altering it;
Enter calibrator name into the edit box to the right of Name;
Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No.;

Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Low, Medium or High
from the pull down list as the concentration level of the calibrator;

Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate as the
expiration date of the calibrator.

NOTE:
Ensure the right expiration date is set so that the analyzer
can correctly judge whether the calibrator has expired.

4-72
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Save button to save the settings; Click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the settings.

NOTE:
If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you
about the wrong settings once you have click the Save
button.

To change the settings of a specific calibrator

1 Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.

2 Click the Edit button and an Attribute window will pop up.

3 The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new calibrator and
you can only view in the No. field without altering it;
Enter calibrator name into the edit box to the right of Name;
Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No.;

Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Low, Medium or High
from the pull down list as the concentration level of the calibrator;

Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate as the
expiration date of the calibrator.
4 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

NOTE:
If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you
about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save
button.

4-73
Advanced Operations

To delete a specific calibrator

1 Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.

2 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion; Click the No button, for any
reason, to abort the deletion.

NOTE:
Once you have confirmed the deletion, the analyzer will
delete all the parameters, including calibrator positions, tests
included, etc., related to the selected calibrator. Ensure the
right calibrator is selected before confirming the deletion.
You cannot delete a calibrator involved in calibrations that
are in process or have been requested.

To set or change positions of a specific calibrator

1 Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.

2 Click the Set Position button.

4-74
Advanced Operations

3 To select a position fromS1 - S6 or 0, click the desired position button; To


select from other positions, click the Other button and select the desired
position from the corresponding pull down list of the Other Position
combo box.
The calibrator positions that appear gray are occupied by other
calibrators.

4 Click the Save Positions button to save the changes.

To set or delete calibrator concentration for a specific test

1 Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.

4-75
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Concentration button and a Concentrations window will pop


up.

As the figure above shows, the window mainly consists of 4 zones:


(1) Calibrator zone – displays the calibrator and its lot number. You can
click “▼” button to the right of Calibrator and select the desired calibrator
from the pull down list or click or until the desired
calibrator is found.
(2) Tests zone – lists all the available tests. The blue-framed tests are
those whose standard concentrations have already been set.
(3) Concentration zone – defines the standard concentration for the
selected test. The standard concentration cannot be negative and if it
appears -1, it indicates you have not set the standard concentration for
the selected test yet.
(4) Operating buttons zone – displays such buttons as Setup, Delete, etc.
3 To set or change the standard concentration for a specific test, click the
Setup button.
To delete the standard concentration of a specific test, click the Delete
button.
4 Click the desired test in the Tests zone. The selected test will be marked
a green tick and click it again to de-select it. You can choose multiple tests
and set or delete their standard concentrations altogether.

4-76
Advanced Operations

5 To delete the standard concentration of the selected test or tests, go


directly to the next step;
To set standard concentration of the selected test or tests, enter the
desired value into the edit box below Concentration.
6 Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the changes.
7 If you do not need to set or delete standard concentration for another
calibrator, go directly to the next step;

To set or delete standard concentrations for another calibrator, click “▼”


button to the right of Calibrator and select the desired calibrator from the
pull down list or click or until the desired calibrator is
found. Then go back to steps 3.
8 Click the Return button to exit the Concentration window.

To exit the Calibration screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Calibration screen.

4.2.3.2 Calibration tab

The Calibration tab is where you set calibration parameters for the tests.

Figure 4-28 Calibration tab

Click the Calibration tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-28 shows. The tab
consists of 4 zones:

Operating buttons zones – lists such buttons as Save, Cancel, Clear, etc.
Tests Included zone – lists all the available tests. Those tests followed by

forbidden marks, such as , have no reagent positions yet and you

4-77
Advanced Operations

cannot set the calibration parameters for them. The blue-framed tests are those
whose calibration parameters have already been set.
Request zone – defines the nine parameters regarding calibration requests.
Calibrators zone – lists the calibrators that have already been set. The
selected calibrator will be preceded by a red tick; the expired calibrator will be
preceded by a red block.

Parameter What it does How to set


Rule Defines the calibration rule. Click “▼” to the right of
Rule and select from
The rules include One-point linear,
the pull down list.
Two-point linear, Multi-point linear,
Logistic 4P, Logistic 5P, Exponential
5P, Polynomial 5p, Parabola and
Spline. One-point linear is the default.
Replicates Defines for how many times (1-5) the Enter the desire
calibration test should be re-run. The integer(1-5) into the
default value is 1. edit box to the right of
If the entered value is 2, the analyzer Replicates or click
will take average of the two runs as the button on the right of
final result; the edit box until the
desired value is
If the entered value is 3, the analyzer reached.
will first remove the one with the largest
deviation and then take average of the
remaining two runs as the final result;
If the entered value is 4 or 5, the
analyzer will first remove the largest
and the smallest results and take
average of the remaining results as the
final result.
Difference Defines the maximum difference Enter the desired value
between the largest response and the (0-2.5) into the edit box
smallest response. Once the actual to the right of
difference exceeds this value, the Difference.
system will alert the user. The entered
value should be no less than 0 and no
greater than 2.5. The default value is 0,
meaning you do not want to do this
check.
Interval Defines the interval (0-99 days) Enter the desired
between two adjacent auto calibrations. integer (0-99) into the
The default value is 0, indicating you do edit box to the right of
not need the analyzer to remind you of Interval or click on
the next calibration. the right of the edit box
until the desired value
is reached.
Blank Defines the response upper limit (0-2.5) Enter the desired value
response for the 0-concentration calibrator. The (0-2.5) into the second
system will alert the user once the blank edit box to the right of
result exceeds this limit. The default Blank response.
value is 0, meaning you do not want to
do this check.

4-78
Advanced Operations

Parameter What it does How to set


Sensitivity Defines the maximum difference Enter the desired value
between the response of the into the edit box to the
largest-concentration calibrator and that right of Sensitivity.
of the smallest-concentration calibrator.
The system will alert the user once the
actual difference exceeds this limit.
The default value is 0, meaning you do
not want to do this check.
Coefficient Defines the difference between the Enter the desired value
difference calibration factors (slope of the into the edit box to the
calibration curve) of current and last right of Coefficient
calibrations ((Current-Last)/Last). It only difference.
applies to multi-point linear calibrations.
The default value is 0, meaning you do
not want to do this check.
Correlation Applies only to multi-point linear or Enter the desired value
non-linear calibrations. The valid value into the edit box to the
is 0-1. The default value is 0, meaning right of Correlation.
you do not want to do this check.
Non-linear Applies only to non-linear calibrations. Enter the desired value
SD The fault value is 0, meaning you do not into the edit box to the
want to do this check. right of Non-linear SD.

To view the calibration parameters of a specific test

1 Select the desired calibration rule.

2 Select the desired test to view its calibration settings.

4-79
Advanced Operations

To set or change the calibration parameters for a specific test

1 Select the desired calibration rule.

2 Click the Setup button.


3 Click the test or tests. The selected tests will be followed by a green tick.

4 Set the request parameters as instructed above.

5 Select the calibrator or calibrators and the selected calibrator or


calibrators will be preceded by a red tick.

NOTE:
You must determine the number of the calibrators to be used
according to the selected calibration rule. You can only
select calibrators whose standard concentrations have
already been set.

4-80
Advanced Operations

6 Click the Save button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

NOTE:
If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you
about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save
button.

To clear calibration settings of a specific test

1 Select the desired calibration rule.

2 Select the test or tests whose calibration settings you want to clear.

3 Click the Clear button to clear the settings.

NOTE:
Once you have clicked the Clear button, the analyzer will
immediately clear all the calibration settings related to the
selected test without asking you to confirm the clearing.
Ensure the right test is selected before clicking the Clear
button.

To exit the Calibration screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Calibration screen.

4.2.3.3 Calib. Data tab

The Calib. Data tab, as Figure 4-29 shows, is where you search for the calibration
results and edit them.

4-81
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-29 Calib. Data tab

To view the calibration result

1 To specify the search conditions.

Click “▼” to the right of Test, or click or to select previous or


next test until the desired one is reached;

Click “▼” to the right of Start (or End) and select the desired date to
specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the
calibration runs taking place during this specified period.

2 Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.


3 Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be
displayed in the Results zone.

NOTE:
If no calibration run matches the specified conditions, a
dialog box will pop up to remind you no match is found.
Under this circumstance, go directly to step 6.

4-82
Advanced Operations

4 If you do not intend to check the calibration curve, go directly to step 6;


Otherwise, click the Curve button to enter the Curve window to view the
calibration result.

To print out the calibration curve, click the Print button.


5 Click the Return button to close the Curve window.
6 If you do not intend to check other calibration results, the operation is
over; otherwise, click the Unlock button and return to step 1.

To re-calculate the calibration parameters using other methods

1 To specify the search conditions:

Click “▼” to the right of Test, or click or to check previous or


next test until the desired one is reached;

Click “▼” to the right of Start (or End) and select the desired date to
specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the
calibration runs taking place during this specified period.
2 Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3 Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be
displayed in the Results zone. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4 Select the desired calibrations (except for those whose Result Type
displays Calib. Edit) from the Calibration field.

5 Click the Re-calculate button.

4-83
Advanced Operations

6 Select the desired calibrator from the Results field.

7 Select the desired calibration rule from the pull down list to the left of
Rule.

8 Click the Calculate button to start the calculation; click the Cancel button,
for any reason, to cancel the calculation.

To delete the calibration settings

1 To specify the search conditions:

Click “▼” to the right of Test, or click or to check previous or


next test until the desired one is reached;

Click “▼” to the right of Start (or End) and select the desired date to
specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the
calibration runs taking place during this specified period.
2 Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3 Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be
displayed in the Results zone. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4 Select the desired calibrations from the Calibration field.

NOTE:
You cannot select the calibration whose Default field
displays Yes.

5 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

4-84
Advanced Operations

6 Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to cancel the deletion.

To define the default settings

1 To specify the search conditions:

Click “▼” to the right of Test, or click or to check previous or


next test until the desired one is reached;

Click “▼” to the right of Start (or End) and select the desired date to
specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the
calibration runs taking place during this specified period.
2 Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3 Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be
displayed in the Results zone. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4 Select the desired calibrations from the Calibration field.

5 Click the Default button to set the current calibration settings as the
default settings of the selected test. The Default field of the calibration will
display Yes.

NOTE:
This analyzer uses the default calibration settings to
calculate the sample concentrations.
This analyzer will automatically set the latest settings
(include the settings of calibration test, edit, calculation) as
the default.

To exit the Calibration screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Calibration screen.

4.2.4 QC
The QC screen is where you set the parameters regarding controls and QC runs and
view QC results.

To enter the QC screen, click Parameters → QC, or press CTRL + I.

4-85
Advanced Operations

NOTE:
If you are not authorized to change the QC parameters, a dialog box
will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and
password.

Figure 4-30 QC screen

At the QC screen, Figure 4-30, you can see the following tabs:

Controls – defines parameters regarding the controls.


QC Rules – defines parameters regarding the QC rule.
QC – defines parameters regarding the QC test.
Real-time – displays information regarding real-time control.
Daily – displays information regarding daily control.
Day-to-day – displays information regarding day-to-day control.

4.2.4.1 Controls tab

The Controls tab is where you set parameters for the controls.

4-86
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-31 Controls tab

Click the Controls tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-31 shows. The tab mainly
consists of 4 zones:

Controls zone – displays such control parameters as lot number, expiration


date, etc.
Positions zone – displays the positions of the controls.
Tests included zone – displays available tests that related to the selected
control in Controls zone..
Operating buttons – such buttons as Add, Edit, etc.

Five virtual sample disks (Disk1 - Disk5) are displayed in the Positions zone and
every virtual disk has 3 control positions (C1 - C3). The 0 position (default) means
this virtual disk has no position set for the control yet. The Other means you can set
other positions for the controls on the disk.

You cannot request a QC run for a control whose corresponding control positions on
all of the five virtual disks are 0s.

4-87
Advanced Operations

To view positions and tests of a specific control

1 Click the desired control in the Controls zone and check its positions and
tests in the Positions and Tests included zones respectively.

To add a new control

1 Click the Add button and an Attribute window will pop up.

2 The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new control and
you can only view in the No. field without altering it;
Enter control name into the edit box to the right of Name;
Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No.;

Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Low, Medium or High
from the pull down list as the concentration level of the control;

Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate date as the
expiration date of the control;

Click “▼” to the right of Tube Type and select Large Tube or Small Tube
for the control.

NOTE:
Ensure the right expiration date is set so that the analyzer
can correctly judge whether the control has expired.

4-88
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Save button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the change.

NOTE:
If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you
about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save
button.

To change the settings of a specific control

1 Select the desired control from the Controls zone.

2 Click the Edit button and an Attribute window will pop up.

3 The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new control and
you can only view in the No. field without altering it;
Enter control name into the edit box to the right of Name;
Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No.;

Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Low, Medium or High
from the pull down list as the concentration level of the control;

Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate date as the
expiration date of the control;

Click “▼” to the right of Tube Type and select Large Tube or Small Tube
for the control.

4-89
Advanced Operations

4 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes

NOTE:
If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you
about the wrong settings once you have click the Save
button.

To delete a specific control

1 Select the desired control from the Controls zone.

2 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm
the deletion.

3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion; Click the No button, for any
reason, to abort the deletion.

NOTE:
Once you have confirmed the deletion, the analyzer will
delete all the parameters, including control positions, tests
included, etc., related to the selected control. Ensure the
right control is selected before confirming the deletion.
You cannot delete a control involved in QC runs that are in
process or have been requested.

4-90
Advanced Operations

To set or change position of a specific control

1 Select the desired control from the Controls zone.

2 Click the Set Position button.


3 To select a position from C1 - C3 or 0, click the desired position button;
To select other position, click the Other button and select the desired
position from the corresponding pull down list of the combo box.

The control positions that appear gray are occupied by other controls.
4 Click the Save Position button to save the changes.

To set standard concentration and SD for a specific test

1 Select the desired control from the Controls zone.

4-91
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Concentration button and a Concentrations window will pop


up.

As the figure above shows, the window mainly consists of 4 zones:


(1) Controls zone – displays the control to be set. You can select the
desired calibrator from the pull down list or click or until
the desired calibrator is found.
(2) Tests zone – lists all the available tests. The blue-framed tests are
those whose standard concentrations have already been set.
(3) Concentration and SD zone – defines the standard concentration and
SD for the selected test. Neither the standard concentration nor the SD
can be negative. When the Concentration or SD field displays -1, it
indicates the standard concentration or SD has not been set yet.
(4) Operating buttons zone – displays such buttons as Setup, Delete, etc.
3 To set or change the standard concentration or SD for a specific test, click
the Setup button.
To delete the standard concentration or SD of a specific test, click the
Delete button.
4 Click the desired test in the Tests zone. The selected test will be marked
a green tick and click it again to de-select it. You can choose multiple tests
and set or delete their standard concentrations or SD altogether.

5 To delete the standard concentrations or Sods of the selected tests, go


directly to next step; Otherwise, enter the desired values into the edit
boxes below Concentration and SD respectively.

4-92
Advanced Operations

6 Click the OK button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the change.
7 If you do not want to set or delete standard concentration or SD for
another control, go directly to the next step;

Otherwise, click “▼” button to the right of Controls and select the desired
control from the pull down list or click or until the desired
control is found. Then go back to step 3.
8 Click the Return button to exit the Concentrations window.

To exit the QC screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.

4.2.4.2 QC Rules tab

The QC Rules tab is where you set QC rules for the tests.

Figure 4-32 QC Rules tab

Click the QC Rules tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-32 shows. The tab
consists of 3 zones:

Independent Parameters zone


Control-related Parameters zone
Operating buttons zone

The QC rules can be divided into two categories: independent rules, such as
Cumulative Sum Check and Westgard Multi-rule, and control-related rules (not
related to controls), such as Accumulated Error and X-R. Note that you cannot set
the parameters of the control-related rules unless you have specified the controls to
be used.

4-93
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-33 Independent Parameters zone

As Figure 4-33 shows, all the available tests are listed on the left and the rules,
Cumulative Sum Check and Westgard Multi-rule, are listed on the right. The
Cumulative Sum Check rule has three sub-rules and you can choose one of the
sub-rules. The Westgard Multi-rule rule has six sub-rules and you can choose one
or more sub-rules.

Figure 4-34 Control-related Parameters zone

As Figure 4-34 shows, all the available tests are listed on the left and the QC rule
parameters are listed in the Rule Settings field, including Controls, Accumulated
Error and X-R QC Rule.

Note that any test whose standard concentration and SD have not been set yet will
be followed by a forbidden mark, such as .

To set the independent parameters

1 Tick the check box to the left of Independent Parameters.

2 Click the Set button.

4-94
Advanced Operations

3 Select the desired test or tests. The selected test will be followed by a
green tick.

4 Click the option to the left of the desired sub-rule.

5 Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the settings.
6 Repeat from step 2 to set the parameters for other tests, or click the check
box to the left of Independent Parameters again to de-select the field.

To set the control-related parameters

1 Tick the check box to the left of Control-related Parameters.

2 Click the Set button.

4-95
Advanced Operations

3 Select the desired test or tests. The selected test will be followed by a
green tick.

4 To set the parameters: click “▼” button to the right of Controls and select
the desired control from the pull down list; enter the desired E (limit of the
accumulated error) into the edit box to the right of Limit E; enter the
desired SDR value in the edit box to the right SDR (for the X-R rule).

5 Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the settings.
6 Repeat from step 2 to set the parameters for other tests, or click the check
box to the left of Control-related Parameters again to de-select the field.

To exit the QC screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.

4.2.4.3 QC tab

The QC tab is where you set QC parameters for the tests.

4-96
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-35 QC tab

As Figure 4-35 shows, the QC tab consists of four zones:

Tests zone – lists all the available tests.


Controls to be used zone – lists all the available controls.
Auto QC zone – defines parameters regarding auto QC.
Operating buttons – lists such buttons as Save, Clear, etc.

The tests, whose QC parameters have already been set, are blue-framed. The tests
whose reagent positions have not been set yet are followed by a forbidden mark,
such as , and you cannot set QC parameters for the test.

All the controls that have been set are listed in the Controls to be used zone. The
selected tests will be preceded by a red tick and the expired test will be preceded by
a red mark.

You can set the interval of the automatic QC runs by entering the desired number
into the edit box to the right of Interval or clicking on the right of the edit box until
the desired number is reached. To disable the auto QC function, enter 0 into the edit
box.

4-97
Advanced Operations

To view the QC settings of a selected test

1 Click the desired test.

To set or change the QC parameters of a selected test

1 Click the Set button.


2 Select the desired test or tests. The selected parameter will be followed
by a green tick.

3 Select the controls to be used.

4 Set the interval for the automatic QC runs.

4-98
Advanced Operations

5 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

NOTE:
If any parameter is inappropriately set, the analyzer will alert
you after you have clicked the Save button.

To clear QC settings for a test

1 Select the desired test.

2 Click the Clear button to clear the settings.

NOTE:
Once you have clicked the Clear button, the analyzer will
immediately clear the QC settings related to the selected test
without asking you to confirm the clearing. Ensure the right
test is selected before clicking the Clear button.

To exit the QC screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.

4.2.4.4 Real-time tab

The Real-time tab is where you view and print the real-time QC results and delete
the real-time QC data.

4-99
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-36 Real-time tab

To view the results of a real-time control

1 Select the desired test from the Tests zone. The selected test will be
followed by a green mark.

2 Tick the desired control or controls.

3 Click the Search button to display the information, including the results,
QC graph, statistic data and QC status, of the last 10 control runs of the
selected test using the selected control or controls.
To print the displayed data and graph, click the Print button.

To print out the result of a control run

1 Click the Print button to print out the result and QC graph after checking
the result of a control run.

4-100
Advanced Operations

To delete data of a real-time control

1 Select the desired test in the Test field. The selected test will be marked
with a green block to the right of it.

2 Select the desired control in the Controls field.

3 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask to enter the
user name and the password of the authority to delete the real time
control data.

4 Enter the user name and password as required and click the OK button to
enter the Edit QC data window.

4-101
Advanced Operations

5 Select the results to be deleted.

6 Click the Delete button to confirm the deletion.


7 Click the Close button to exit the Edit QC data window.

To exit the QC screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.

4.2.4.5 Daily tab

The Daily tab is where you view and print the daily QC results and delete the daily
QC data.

Figure 4-37 Daily tab

4-102
Advanced Operations

To view the results of a daily control

1 Click “▼” to the right of Date and select the desired date from the pull
down list to search the QC runs taking place within this date.
2 Click “▼” to the right of Rule and select the desired QC rule from the pull
down list.

3 Select the desired test from the Tests zone. The selected test will be
followed by a green mark.

4 Tick the desired control or controls.

5 Click the Search button to display the information, including the results,
QC graph, statistic data and QC status, of the last 10 control runs of the
selected test using the selected control or controls.
To print the displayed data and graph, click the Print button.

To print out the result of a control run

1 Click the Print button to print out the result and QC graph after checking
the result of a control run.

To delete the data of a daily control

1 Select the desired date from the Date field.

4-103
Advanced Operations

2 Select the desired test in the Test field. The selected test will be marked
with a green block to the right of it.

3 Select the desired control in the Controls field.

4 Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask to enter the
user name and the password of the authority to delete the real time
control data.

5 Enter the user name and password as required and click the OK button to
enter the Edit QC data window.

4-104
Advanced Operations

6 Select the results to be deleted.

7 Click the Delete button to confirm the deletion.


8 Click the Close button to exit the Edit QC Data window.

To exit the QC screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.

4.2.4.6 Day-to-day tab

The Day- to-day tab is where you view and print the day-to-day QC results.

Figure 4-38 Day-to-day tab

4-105
Advanced Operations

To view the results of a day-to-day control

1 Click “▼” to the right of Start (or End) and select the desired date to
specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the QC runs
taking place during this specified period.
2 Click “▼” to the right of Rule and select the desired QC rule from the pull
down list.

3 Select the desired test from the Tests zone. The selected test will be
followed by a green mark.

4 Tick the desired control or controls.

5 Click the Search button to display the information, including the results,
QC graph, statistic data and QC status, of the last 10 control runs of the
selected test using the selected control or controls.
To print the displayed data and graph, click the Print button.

To print out the result of a control run

1 Click the Print button to print out the result and QC graph after checking
the result of a control run.

To exit the QC screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.

4-106
Advanced Operations

4.3 Data

Data Import Data

Export Data

Patient Info.

Result

4.3.1 Export Data


Click Data → Export Data or press CTRL + F to enter the Export Data screen, as
Figure 4-39 shows.

NOTE:
This analyzer automatically backs up its settings and test results.
Exporting data refers to saving some data to a file (.SHD file)
temporarily so that the data can be transmitted or updated. It is not the
same as backing up the database.
Mindray recommends this exporting function not be used unless it is
necessary.

Figure 4-39 Export Data screen

As Figure 4-39 shows, the Export Data screen consists of the following fields:

4-107
Advanced Operations

Test
Calibration
QC
Sample
Others
Select tests
Separator

The item in blue font listed in the Test, Calibration, QC and Sample fields is
test-related and you can select test in the Select Tests field for these items.

NOTE:
If the data to be exported includes the data of last year, Mindray
recommends the Start date be not before November 1. Otherwise,
you may not get the complete data.

To select all the items

1 Click the Select All button to select all the items.

To de-select all the items

1 Click the Clear button to de-select all the items.

To export data

1 Select the items to be included in the exported data as instructed below.


Tick the check box to the left of the desired item to include it.
For the items in black font, they can be included into the exported data
simply by ticking the corresponding check boxes.
For the items in blue font, ticking their corresponding check boxes means
they apply to all the available tests. If you only intend to apply them to
certain tests, first specify the corresponding fields in the Apply to field and
then select the desired tests from the Select tests field. See the examples
below for details.

4-108
Advanced Operations

Example1:
Follow the steps below to select: a) calculated tests (Calculation of the Test
field) and units (Unit of the Test field) for all the tests; b) test parameters
(Parameters of the Test field) for TP_KH and ALB_KH only.
(1) Tick the check boxes to the left of Parameters, Calculation, and Unit in
the Test field respectively.
(2) Tick the check box to the left of Test in the Apply to field.
(3) Tick the check boxes to the left of TP_KH and ALB_KH in the Select
tests field respectively.

Example2:
Follow the steps below to select: a) calibration parameters (Parameters in
the Calibration field) for all the tests; b) calibration results (Results in the
Calibration) for the tests analyzed on December 1, 2004 and December 2,
2004 only.
(1) Tick the check boxes to the left of Parameters and Results in the
Calibration field respectively.
(2) Select December 1, 2004 from the pull down list to the left of the Start in
the Calibration field.
(3) Select December 2, 2004 from the pull down list to the left of End in the
Calibration field.

4-109
Advanced Operations

Example3:
Follow the steps below to select the TP_KH results of the samples: a)
sample IDs are 1 - 10; b) analyzed on December 1, 2004 and December 2,
2004.
(1) Tick the check boxes to the left of Test Results in the Sample field
(2) Enter 1 and 10 into the edit boxes to the right of Sample ID respectively.
(3) Select December 1, 2004 from the pull down list to the left of the Start in
the Sample field.
(4) Select December 2, 2004 from the pull down list to the left of End in the
Sample field.
(5) Tick the check box to the left of Sample in the Applied to field.
(6) Tick the check box to the left of TP_KH in the Select tests field.

4-110
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Export button and a dialog box will pop up.

Save in:

File Name: Save

Save as Type: Cancel

3 Select the desired directory and file and click the Save button to save the
data. You may also click the Cancel button to cancel the exporting.

To exit the Export Data screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Export Data screen.

4.3.2 Import Data


Click Data → Import Data or press CTRL + E to enter the Import Data screen, as
Figure 4-40 shows. Note that you need a user name and password of the
administrator authority to enter the screen.

Figure 4-40 Import Data screen

4-111
Advanced Operations

NOTE:
The imported data will overwrite the corresponding data in the
analyzer’s database. Before importing data, ensure the corresponding
data is exported to another file. You can only import data from .SHD
files.
Mindray recommends this importing function not be used unless
necessary.

To import data

1 Click the Import File button and a dialog box will pop up.

Look in:

File Name: Open

Files of Type: Cancel

2 Select the desired file and click the Open button to open the selected file.

3 Click the Import button to import the data into the database. A dialog box
will pop up when then importing is done. Click the OK button to close the
box.

4-112
Advanced Operations

To exit the Import Data screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Import Data.

4.3.3 Patient Info.


Click Data → Patient info. or press CTRL + A to enter the Patient Information
screen, as Figure 4-41 shows. You can set patient information and add manual
samples at the screen.

Figure 4-41 Patient Information

As Figure 4-41 shows, you can click (to the first patient), (to the
previous patient), (to the next patient) or (to the last patient) to
select the desired patient.

To view the information of a patient

1 Select the date when the patient sample was requested from the pull
down list to the right of Date. The current date is the default.
2
You can click , , or to select the desired
patient, or you can enter the ID of the desired sample into the edit box to
the right of Move to and click the Move to button to go to the desired
sample.

To add a new manual sample

1 Select the date from the pull down list to the right of Date. The current
date is the default.

4-113
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Add button to add a new manual sample whose ID (greater than
9000) is generated by the system automatically.
3 Enter the patient information of the sample.
The Date and the Sample ID cannot be changed.
The Bar Code can be entered manually or by the bar code reader.
4 If you want to save the new manual sample, click the Save button;
otherwise, click the Cancel button.

To edit the patient information

1 Select the date when the patient sample was requested from the pull
down list to the right of Date. The current date is the default.
2
You can click , , or to select the desired
patient, or you can enter the ID of the desired sample into the edit box to
the right of Move to and click the Move to button to go to the desired
sample.
3 Click the Edit button.
4 Edit the patient information as needed.
The Date and the Sample ID cannot be changed.
5 Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the changes.

To define the default setting

1 Select the date from the pull down list to the right of Date. The current
date is the default.
2 Click the buttons , , , , or after
entering the sample ID to the right of Move to, click the Move to, to select
a sample.
3 Click the Edit button.
4 Click the Set as Default button to set the Sample (sample type), Sender
(doctor who sends the sample), From Dep. (department from which the
sample is sent), Tester (doctor who analyzes the sample) and Lab. (the
laboratory to analyze the sample) as the default settings.
5 Click the Save or Cancel button.

NOTE:
The default setting is only available at the current screen. If you click
the Exit button to close the Patient Information screen, the default
setting disappears and you need to set it again when you enter the
screen the next time.

4-114
Advanced Operations

To obtain the default setting

If you add a new manual sample, after you clicking the Add button, the Sample,
Sender, From Dep., Tester and Lab. are set as the default.

If you edit the patient information of a sample, you can insert a step between the
step 3 and step 4 of “To edit the patient information”: click the Load Default button.

To exit the Patient Information screen

1 Click the Exit button to exit the Patient Information screen.

4.3.4 Result
Click Data → Results or press Ctrl + R to enter the Results & Statistics screen, as
Figure 4-42 shows.

Figure 4-42 Results & Statistics screen

At the Results & Statistics screen, you can see the following tabs: Test Data, Test
Results and Test Status.

4.3.4.1 Test Data tab

The Test Data tab is where you can view, edit, revise and print the sample results
and send them to LIS in batch mode.

4-115
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-43 Test Data tab

To view sample results

1 Click “▼” to the right of Start (or End) and select the desired date to
specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the sample
runs taking place during this specified period.

NOTE:
In case of a year-to-year search, the start date must not be
earlier than November 1st of the previous year.

2 Specify other desired search conditions or go directly to the next step.

4-116
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be
displayed.

NOTE:
If no sample run matches the specified conditions, a dialog
box will pop up to remind you no match is found.

4 Click the By sample, and then select a sample to view its results.

Click the By test to view the results of all sample runs.

4-117
Advanced Operations

To view reaction curve

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for
details.
2 Select a sample run.
If you select By sample, select a sample and then a run.

If you select By test, select a sample run directly.

4-118
Advanced Operations

3
NOTE:
You will see the Curve button except that you select LIS in
the Operation field.

Click the Curve button to check the reaction curve and data of the
selected blank runs.

There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab
and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter
to check the data.

4-119
Advanced Operations

4 If you do not want to check the results of other runs, go directly to the next
step;
Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button to check other runs (blanks,
samples, controls, or calibrations); or click the Return button and repeat
from step 2.
5 Click the Return button to close the Reaction Curve window.

To set printing options

1 Click the option button to the left of Print in the Operation field.

2 Click the Print Setup button to enter the Printing Setup screen. Refer to
4.4.7 Print for details.

To print out patient reports

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for
details.
2 Select By sample.
3 Click the option button to the left of Print in the Operation field.

4-120
Advanced Operations

4 Select the sample or samples you want to print. You can select them by
clicking the Group Selection button or ticking the check boxes directly.

NOTE:
Click the Group Selection button, and a dialog box will pop
up to ask you to enter the start number of the sample.

Enter the number as required and click the OK button, and


another dialog box will pop up to ask you enter the end
number of the sample.

Enter the number as required and click the OK button. The


analyzer will select the two samples and those between
them.
If you want to de-select samples, click the Group Deletion
button, and the system will de-select two samples and those
between them.

5 Click the Print button to pop up the Print Preview screen.

At the Print Preview screen, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing)
for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current
page) or Pr. All (printing all pages) for other types of printers.

4-121
Advanced Operations

6 When you finish printing, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview
screen.

To print out a patient report in a combined mode

This function will help you print different sample results of the same patient in one
report.

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for
details.
2 Select By sample.
3 Click the option button to the left of Print in the Operation field.

4 Select the sample or samples (5 is the maximum) you want to print. You
can select them by clicking the Group Selection button or ticking the
check boxes directly.
5 Click the Combined Print button to pop up the Print Preview screen.

4-122
Advanced Operations

6 If you have intended to print out all the results, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Selected Test button in the preview window to select
the tests to be printed out. Then after clicking the OK button, click the
Hide Selecting Test button.

7 At the Print Preview screen, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing)
for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current
page) or Pr. All (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
8 When you finish printing, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview
screen.

To print out test reports

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for
details.
2 Select By test.
3 Click the option button to the left of Print in the Operation field.

4-123
Advanced Operations

4 Select the sample run or runs you want to print. You can select them by
clicking the Group Selection button or ticking the check boxes directly.

NOTE:
Click the Group Selection button, and a dialog box will pop
up to ask you to enter the start number of the run.

Enter the number as required and click the OK button, and


another dialog box will pop up to ask you enter the end
number of the run.

Enter the number as required and click the OK button. The


analyzer will select the two runs and those between them.
If you want to de-select runs, click the Group Deletion
button, and the system will de-select two runs and those
between them.

5 Click the Print button to pop up the Print Preview screen.

At the Print Preview screen, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing)
for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current
page) or Pr. All (printing all pages) for other types of printers.

4-124
Advanced Operations

6 When you finish printing, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview
screen.

To edit manual results

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for
details.

NOTE:
The End (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise,
you cannot edit manual results.

2 Select By sample.
3 Click the option button to the left of Edit manual test in the Operation
field.

4 Click the Edit manual test button.


5 Select a sample or samples. If you select more than one sample, you will
set the same manual results for them.

6 Edit manual results in the Edit results field.

9 If you want to save the setting, click the Save button; otherwise, click the
Cancel button.

To edit sample results

NOTE:
Sample results can only be edited by authorized personnel.
If an unauthorized personnel wants to edit sample results, a dialog box
will pop up to ask you to enter authorized user name and password.

4-125
Advanced Operations

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for details.

NOTE:
The End (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise,
you cannot edit sample results.

2 Select By sample.
3 Click the option button to the left of Edit sample test in the Operation field.

4 Select a sample.

5 Select a sample run.

6 Click the Edit sample test button.


7 Enter new result to the right of Result.

8 If you want to save the setting, click the Save button; otherwise, click the
Cancel button.

To revise sample results

NOTE:
Sample results can only be revised by authorized personnel.
If an unauthorized personnel wants to revise sample results, a dialog
box will pop up to ask you to enter authorized user name and
password.

4-126
Advanced Operations

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for details.

NOTE:
The End (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise,
you cannot revise sample results.

2 Select By test.
3 Click the option button to the left of Revise in the Operation field.

4 Click the Correct button.


5 Select a sample run or runs. You can select them by clicking the Group
Selection button or ticking the check boxes directly. If you select more than
one runs, you will set the same factors for them.
6 Enter factor a and b to the right of Factor a: and Factor b:. The system will
revise the results of the selected runs according to the formula Y=aX+b (Y
stands for the new result and X stands for the old result).

7 If you want to revise the results, click the Save button; otherwise, click the
Cancel button.

To send sample results to LIS in batch mode

1 Search for the sample results. Refer to To view sample results for details.

NOTE:
The End (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise,
you cannot send sample results to the LIS in batch mode.

2 Select By sample.
3 Click the option button to the left of LIS in the Operation field.

4 Select a sample or samples. You can select them by clicking the Group
Selection button or ticking the check boxes directly.

4-127
Advanced Operations

5 Click the Send Result button to send the results of the selected samples to
the LIS.
When the results are sent, a dialog box will pop up.

Click the Close button to exit the dialog box.

NOTE:
There are two modes to send information to the LIS, the real-time
mode and the batch mode.
You can send information to the LIS in batch mode at any time only
except that when you select the Real Time Mode at the Test Settings
screen and the system is testing.

To exit the Result & Statistics screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Result & Statistics screen.

4.3.4.2 Test Results tab

The Test Results tab is where you view the statistic information of sample results.

Figure 4-44 Test Results tab

4-128
Advanced Operations

As Figure 4-44 shows, the search conditions are listed on the upper left of the
screen, such statistic data as SD and Mean on the lower left, expected range on the
upper right and statistic graph on the middle right.

To view statistic information of sample results

1 Specify the desired search conditions.

NOTE:
To specify the age range of the patients, enter the lower limit
of the range into the edit box to the right of Youngest and
the upper limit into the edit box to the right of Oldest.
If you enter 0s into both the boxes, it means there is no
specific requirement on the ages.

2 Click the Search button and the analyzer will search for the matches and
present a statistic graph of the results found.

To exit the Results & Statistics screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Results & Statistics screen.

4-129
Advanced Operations

4.3.4.3 Test Status tab

The Test Status tab is where you view the status of the tests and the reagents.

Figure 4-45 Test Status tab

To view the reagent status of a test

1 Click the Refresh button to refresh the displayed work list.


2 Click the desired test and the corresponding reagent status will be
displayed on the right of the screen.

To exit the Results & Statistics screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Results & Statistics screen.

4-130
Advanced Operations

4.4 System

System System Status

Setup

Hospital

User

Log

Maintenance

Print

Temperature

Database

4.4.1 Status
Click System→ System Status or press CTRL + P to enter the Status screen, as
Figure 4-46 shows.

Figure 4-46 Status screen

4-131
Advanced Operations

At the Status screen, you can see two tabs:

Status
Dark Current

4.4.1.1 Status tab

Figure 4-47 Status tab

As Figure 4-47 shows, you can check the status of the major components of the
analyzer.

Note that the light intensity of the lamp is expressed in Lamp Status. The bar to the
right of the Lamp Status represents the light intensity of the lamp in term of
percentage, light intensity of a new lamp being 100%. When the light intensity is
normal, the bar is green. When the light intensity is more than 50%, the bar is yellow.
When the lamp is to be changed, the bar is red. If the system does not detect the
light of the lamp, the bar is white.

The Network Connection displays if the system is connected to the LIS.

Click the Close button to close the Status screen.

4-132
Advanced Operations

4.4.1.2 Dark Current tab

Figure 4-48 Dark Current tab

As Figure 4-48 shows, you can not only view the dark currents of various
wavelengths, but also check the movement of the cuvette loader and wash the
sample and reagent probes and mixing bar.

The Background field shows the dark currents and backgrounds of the nine
wavelengths and one reference wavelength. The dark current refers to the AD output
of the wavelength when the lamp of the photometer is not switched on. The
backgrounds refer to the AD outputs generated by the lights when there are no
cuvettes in the optical paths.

To test the dark current

1 When the analyzer is on standby, click the Test Dark Cur. button and the
readings will be displayed on the screen.

To load/unload cuvette segment to/from a specific position

1 When the analyzer is on standby, select the desired position and click the
Load Cuv. button to load/unload the segment to/from the selected
position.

To wash the sample and reagent probes and the mixing bar

1 When the analyzer is on standby, click the Wash Probe & Bar button and
the analyzer will use acid and alkaline detergents to wash the sample and
reagent probes and the mixing bar.

4-133
Advanced Operations

To exit the Status screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.

4.4.2 Setup
The Test Settings screen is where you set options regarding the routine settings,
re-runs, test units and LIS connection.

To enter the Test Settings screen, click System → Setup, or press Ctrl + F3. A
dialog box will then pop up to ask you to enter your user name and password. You
must have the corresponding authority to enter the Test Settings screen.

NOTE:
Only authorized personnel can enter the Test Settings screen.

At the Test Settings screen, shown in Figure 4-49, you can see the following tabs:

Routine Settings
Re-run Settings
Test Units
LIS Setting

Follow the procedures given below to set them respectively.

4.4.2.1 Routine Settings tab

Figure 4-49 Routine Settings tab

4-134
Advanced Operations

As Figure 4-49 shows, there are several fields you can set at the Routine Settings
tab. Follow the instructions given below to do so.

Field What it does How to set


Auto washing Defines how many times the Enter the desired digit
during analyzer should wash the into the edit box to the
startup/shutdown sample probe, reagent probe right of it.
and the mixing bar during every
startup or shutdown.
Give alarm when Defines when the analyzer Enter the desired digit
reagents are less should alert you about (must be greater than 2)
than tests insufficient reagents. Also into the edit box to the
referred to as the insufficient right of it.
reagents alarm hereinafter.
Alarm Volume Defines the alarm volume when Drag the drag bar.
the analyzer gives alarm for
insufficient reagents. Six
volume levels, increasing from
left to right, are available.
Automatic QC Defines whether the analyzer Click the check box to
should automatically insert QC the left of Yes to tick this
tests among routine tests. option and click it again
to cancel the selection.
Sequence Select the sequence mode of Select an option button.
analyses the runs. Selecting per
samples means arranging runs
by the sequence of samples;
selecting per tests means
arranging runs by the sequence
of tests.
Bar Code If it is selected, you must enter Click the check box to
the bar code information when the left of Yes to tick this
requesting a sample. option and click it again
to cancel the selection.

NOTE:
Set a suitable value for the insufficient reagents alarm so that the
analyzer can alert you about insufficient reagents in time.

When you have finished setting the desired fields, click the Save button to save the
changes. A dialog box will then pop up to remind you the settings are saved, as
Figure 4-50 shows. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

4-135
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-50 A dialog to remind you the settings are saved

If you entered an improper value for any field, a dialog box will pop up to warn you
about the wrong setting after you clicked the Save button, as Figure 4-51 shows.
Seeing the dialog box, click OK button to close it and re-enter a proper value for the
field in question (insufficient reagents alarms, in case of Figure 4-51) and then save
the settings again.

Figure 4-51 A dialog box to warn you about wrong settings

When you have finished setting, you can click the Close button to exit the Test
Settings screen.

4.4.2.2 Re-run Settings tab

Figure 4-52 Re-run Settings tab

4-136
Advanced Operations

Click the Re-run Settings tab to view the 9 available fields in it, as Figure 4-52
shows. Follow the instructions given below to set them.

Field What it does How to set


Re-run Defines how the re-run is Click the option button to
to be conducted, the left of Auto to select the
automatically or manually. auto re-run; Click the option
If automatically, the button to the left of Manual
analyzer will judge to select the manual re-run.
whether a re-run is
necessary based on the Note that the rest 8 fields
specified conditions (the are selectable only if you
other 8 fields in this tab); if have selected Auto.
manually, you should
decide whether to re-run
the test yourself and do it
manually.
Beyond expected Instructs the analyzer to Click the check box to the
range re-dilute and then re-run right of Beyond expected
the sample if the result of range to select it; re-click
the previous run exceeds the check box to de-select
the upper limit of the it.
expected range.
Beyond given linear Instructs the analyzer to Click the check box to the
range re-dilute and then re-run right of Beyond given
the sample if the result of linear range to select it;
the previous run exceeds re-click the check box to
the upper limit of the de-select it.
linear range specified by
the instructions of the
reagent.
Beyond allowed Instructs the analyzer to Click the check box to the
response range re-dilute and then re-run right of Beyond allowed
the sample if the result of response range to select
the previous run is it; re-click the check box to
beyond the allowed de-select it.
response range.
Substrate out Instructs the analyzer to Click the check box to the
(Kinetic and Fixed re-dilute and then re-run right of Substrate out
Time) the sample if the Kinetic and Fixed Time) to
substrate ran out during select it; re-click the check
the previous sample run. box to de-select it.
It only applies to the runs
employing Kinetic or
Fixed Time methods.
Surplus Antigen Instructs the analyzer to Click the check box to the
re-dilute and then re-run right of Surplus Antigen to
the sample if the surplus select it; re-click the check
antigen was found during box to de-select it.
the previous sample run.

4-137
Advanced Operations

Field What it does How to set


No Balance Point Instructs the analyzer to Click the check box to the
(Endpoint) re-dilute and then re-run right of No Balance Point
the sample if no balance (Endpoint) to select it;
point was detected during re-click the check box to
the previous sample run. de-select it.
It only applies to the
sample runs employing
Endpoint method.
Dilution Defines the dilution ratio Enter the desired digit
to re-dilute the sample. It (4-150) into the edit box to
must be an integer no the right of it.
less than 4 and no greater
than 150.
Sample vol. Defines the sample to be Enter the desired digit
aspirated for re-dilution. It (3-45) into the edit box to
must be an integer no the right of it.
less than 3(µl) and no
greater than 45(µl).

NOTE:
For the Dilution and Sample vol. Fields, besides the restrictions
mentioned above, you must also guarantee the diluted sample is no
less than 180µl and no more than 450µl.

When you have finished setting the desired fields, click the Save button to save the
changes. A dialog box will then pop up to remind you the settings are saved, as
Figure 4-53 shows. Clicks OK button to close the dialog box.

Figure 4-53 A dialog to remind you the settings are saved

If you entered an improper value for any filed, a dialog box will pop up to warn you
about the wrong setting after you clicked the Save button. Seeing the dialog box,
click OK to close it and then re-enter a proper value for the field in question and then
save the settings again.

When you have finished setting , you can click Close to exit the Test Settings
screen.

4-138
Advanced Operations

4.4.2.3 Test Units tab

Figure 4-54 Test Units tab

Click the Test Units tab (Figure 4-54) to set the units that will be used for the tests.
Note that all the units to be selected at other screens must be entered here.

Follow the instructions given below to add, edit or delete test units.

To add a new test unit

1 Click the Add button.


2 Enter the desired unit into the edit box to the right of Test Units. In case
of tests without units, enter blank (press the Space key) into the edit box.
3 Click the Save button to save the entered unit; Click the Cancel button,
for any reason, to discard the entered unit.

To edit an existing test unit

1 Click “▼” to the right of Test Units to display the pull-down list and select
the desired unit.
2 Click the Edit button.
3 Edit the unit in the edit box.
4 Click the Save button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the change.

4-139
Advanced Operations

To delete an existing test unit

1 Click “▼” to the right of Test Units to display the pull-down list and select
the desired unit.
2 Click the Delete button to delete the selected unit.

NOTE:
Once you click the Delete button, the software will immediately delete
the selected unit without asking you to confirm the deletion. Ensure the
right unit is selected before clicking the Delete button.

To exit the Test Settings screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Test Settings screen.

4.4.2.4 LIS Setting tab

The LIS Setting tab is where you set the LIS connection mode and the network
parameters.

Figure 4-55 LIS Setting tab

To set mode and network parameters

1 If you select the Real Time Mode in the LIS Connection Mode Setting
field, the system will automatically send the sample results to the LIS
when it is testing.
If you do not select the Real Time Mode in the LIS Connection Mode
Setting field, you can only send the sample results to the LIS in batch

4-140
Advanced Operations

mode at the Result & Statistics screen. Refer to 4.3.4.1 Test Data tab
for details.
2 Enter the IP address of the server on the right of Server IP Address in
the Network Setting field.
3 Enter the port on the right of Port in the Network Setting field.
4 Click the Save button to save the settings.

NOTE:
There are two modes to send information to the LIS, the real-time
mode and the batch mode.
You can send information to the LIS in batch mode at any time only
except that when you select the Real Time Mode at the Test Settings
screen and the system is testing.

To connect/disconnect to the LIS

NOTE:
If the system is not connected to the LIS, the Test and the Connect
buttons are available; otherwise, the Disconnect button is available.

1 If you do not want to check the connection between the system and the
LIS, go directly to the next step;
Otherwise, click the Test button to check the network connection. The
system will pop up a dialog box to tell you whether the connection is
successful.
2 If you want to connect the system to the LIS, click the Connect button;
Otherwise, click the Disconnect button.

To exit the Test Settings screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Test Settings screen.

4.4.3 Hospital
The Hospital Information screen is where you set the options regarding the
hospital and doctors.

To enter the Hospital Information screen, click System → Hospital, or press CTRL
+ H. A dialog box will then pop up to ask you to enter your user name and password.
You must have the administrator authority to enter the Hospital Information screen.

NOTE:
You need the administrator authority to enter the Hospital
Information screen.

4-141
Advanced Operations

At the Hospital Information screen, shown in Figure 4-56, you can see three tabs:

Hospital
Doctors
All Doctors

Follow the instruction s given below to set them.

4.4.3.1 Hospital tab

Figure 4-56 Hospital Information screen (Hospital tab)

As Figure 4-56 shows, you can set hospital name and departments at this tab. The
hospital name you set here will appear on the patients’ assay reports, and all the
departments to be selected at other screens must be entered here.

To edit the hospital name

1 Click the Edit button in the Name field.


2 Enter the desired hospital name into the edit box to the right of Name.
3 Click the Save button in the Name field to save the entered name.

To add a new department

1 Click the Add button in the Department field.


2 Enter the desired department name in the edit box to the right of
Department.

4-142
Advanced Operations

3 Click the Save button in the Department field to save the entered name;
Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to discard the entered name.

To edit an existing department name

1 Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and
select the desired department.
2 Click the Edit button in the Department field.
3 Edit the selected department name in the edit box to the right of
Department.
4 Click the Save button in the Department field to save the change; Click
the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.

To delete an existing department name

1 Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and
select the desired department.
2 Click the Delete button in the Department field to delete the selected
department.

NOTE:
Once you click the Delete button, the analyzer will immediately delete
the selected department, as well as all the doctors (see the next
section) belonging to this department without asking you to confirm the
deletion. Ensure the right department is selected before clicking the
Delete button.

To exit the Hospital Information screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Hospital Information screen.

4-143
Advanced Operations

4.4.3.2 Doctors tab

Figure 4-57 Doctors tab

Click the Doctors tab to show the available fields, as Figure 4-57 shows. All the
doctors to be selected at other screens must be entered here.

There are four buttons at the middle part of the Doctors tab, as Figure 4-58 shows.

Figure 4-58 Buttons at the middle of the Doctors tab

Button Function
Displays the information of the first doctor of the selected
department.
Displays the information of the previous doctor of the selected
department.
Displays the information of the next doctor of the selected
department.
Displays the information of the last doctor of the selected
department.

If there is no existing doctor information in the selected department, the arrows will
appear gray, indicating they are not usable at this moment.

Follow the instructions given below to add, edit or delete doctors to a selected
department.

4-144
Advanced Operations

To add a new doctor

1 Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and
select the desired department.

2 Click the Add button and the analyzer will automatically assign a number
to the new doctor. Note that you cannot change this number.

3 Enter the doctor’s name in the edit box to the right of Name.
4 Enter the doctor’ s duty into the edit box to the right of Duty.
5 Click the Save button to save the change; Click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the change.

To edit information of an existing doctor

1 Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and
select the desired department.
2 Click the arrows to find the desired doctor information if necessary.
3 Click the Edit button.

4 Change the doctor’s name or duty as needed.

4-145
Advanced Operations

5 Click the Save button to save the change; Click the Cancel button, for
any reason, to ignore the change.

To delete the information of an existing doctor

1 Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and
select the desired department.
2 Click the arrows to find the desired doctor information if necessary.
3 Click the Delete button to delete the information of the selected doctor.

NOTE:
Once you click the Delete button, the analyzer will immediately delete
doctor from the selected department without asking you to confirm the
deletion. Ensure the right doctor is selected before clicking the Delete
button.

To exit the Hospital Information screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Hospital Information screen.

4.4.3.3 All Doctors tab

Figure 4-59 All Doctors tab

Click the All Doctors tab to view all the saved doctor information, as Figure 4-59
shows.

To view the information of all the doctors, you can click “ ▼ ” to the right of
Department and select All departments.

To view the information of doctors of a specific department, click “▼” to the right of
Department and select the desired department.

4-146
Advanced Operations

You can click the Close button to exit the Hospital Information screen.

4.4.4 User
Click System → User or press CTRL + B and a dialog box will pop up, as Figure
4-60 shows, to ask you to enter the appropriate user name and password.

Figure 4-60 A dialog box to ask you enter the appropriate user name and password

Enter a user name and a password of the administrator authority to enter the User
Management screen, as Figure 4-61 shows.

NOTE:
Only users of the administrator authority can enter the User
Management screen.

Figure 4-61 User Management screen

Administrator

As Figure 4-61 shows, you can check the existing users or user groups at the User
Management screen.

4-147
Advanced Operations

To add a new user

1 Click User Management → Add User to enter the Add User window.

2 Enter the necessary user information as instructed below.


User Name: Enter the maximum 15 letters or digits into the edit box as
the user name.
Description: Enter additional information regarding the user’s duty, title or
the like.
Password: Enter the password to be used by the user.
Confirm: Re-enter the password here to confirm the entry.
Belongs to: Assign the new user to an existing user group or groups.
Click button to add the new user to all the existing user groups;
click to remove the new user from all the existing groups; click
button to add the new user to a selected group or groups; click
to remove the new user from a selected group or groups.
Department: Select the department the new user belongs to.
Tester: Select the new user’s name from the pull down list.

4-148
Advanced Operations

3 Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the changes.

To delete a user (except for administrator)

1 Select the desired user from the User Name field.

Administrator

2 Click User Management → Delete User and a dialog box will pop up to
ask you to confirm the deletion.

3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion; click the No button to abort
the deletion.

4-149
Advanced Operations

To edit the user information of a user (except for administrator)

1 Select the desired user from the User Name field.

Administrator

2 Click User Management → Edit User to enter the Edit User window.

3 Edit the user information as needed.


4 Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the changes.

4-150
Advanced Operations

To change the user name and password of the administrator

1 Click User Management → Change Admini. Password and a dialog box


will pop up to ask you to enter the user name and password of the
administrator authority.

2 Enter the user name and password as required and click the OK button
and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the new user name
and password.

3 Enter the new username and password as required.

4 Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any
reason, to ignore the changes.

4-151
Advanced Operations

To exit the User Management screen

1 Click on the upper right corner of the screen, or press ALT+ X, or click
User Management → Exit to exit the User Management screen.

4.4.5 Log
Click System → Log or press CTRL + F2 to enter the Log screen, as Figure 4-62
shows.

Figure 4-62 Log screen

Main unit:Response exceeds...

As Figure 4-62 shows, the Log screen lists as many as 300 alarm messages. Once
the saved alarm messages reach 300, the analyzer will automatically save the
messages into a .log file and the file name is the saving time.

4-152
Advanced Operations

To check the current log

1 Click File → Current to list the latest 300 (or less) alarm messages.

To check the previously saved log file

1 Click File → View to enter the View Log File window.

Look in:

File Name: Open

Files of Type:
Cancel

2 Select the desired log file from the “Log” folder under the directory the
BS-300 control system is installed and click the Open button to open the
selected log file.

To clear the current log

1 Click File → Clear and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to save the
current log to a .log file.

4-153
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Yes button to save the log and then clear it; click the No button
to clear the log without saving it.

To exit the Log screen

1 Click File → Exit or on the upper right corner of the screen to exit the
Log screen.

4.4.6 Maintenance
Click System → Maintenance or press CTRL + Q and a dialog box will pop up, as
Figure 4-63 shows, to ask whether you are maintenance personnel.

Figure 4-63 A dialog box to ask you whether you are maintenance personnel

Click the No button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the
appropriate username and password, as Figure 4-64 shows.

Figure 4-64 A dialog box to ask you to enter username and password

Enter a username and password of the administrator authority to enter the System
Maintenance screen, as Figure 4-65 shows.

4-154
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-65 System Maintenance screen

At the System Maintenance screen, the Sent Instruction field and the Received
Data field respectively display the instruction codes sent to the Analyzing Unit and
received by the Operation Unit.

NOTE:
Do not perform any maintenance action unless you are certain the
analyzer is on standby.

To start a maintenance operation

1 Click the desired tab.


2 Click the desired button.

To lock data

1 If you feel the codes displayed in the Sent Instructions and Received
Data fields refresh too fast, click the Lock button, which then will become
the Unlock button, and the displayed data will stop changing. You can
click the Unlock button to resume the data refreshing.

To clear data

1 Click the Clear button to clear the Sent Instructions and Received Data
fields.

To exit the System Maintenance screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the System Maintenance screen.

4-155
Advanced Operations

4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab

Figure 4-66 Sam. Probe tab

Button What it does


Above Inner Circle Click this button and the sample probe will move to a
position above inner circle of the sample disk.
Into Inner Circle Click this button and the sample probe will lower into
the sample tube in the inner circle and stop when it
contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Above Outer Circle Click this button and the sample probe will move to a
position above the outer circle of the sample disk.
Into Outer Circle Click this button and the sample probe will lower into
the sample tube in the outer circle and stop when it
contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Above Reaction Disk Click this button and sample probe will move to a
position above the dispensing hole of the reaction
disk.
Into Reaction Cuvette Click this button and the sample probe will lower into
the reaction cuvette and stop when it contacts the
liquid surface or the reaction cuvette bottom.
Above Wash Well Click this button and the sample probe will move to a
position above the wash well.

4-156
Advanced Operations

NOTE:
Ensure the sample disk is placed in the home position or stopped at
certain tube position before clicking Into Inner Circle or Into Outer
Circle button. Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision.
Ensure the reaction disk is placed in the home position or stopped at
certain cuvette position before clicking Into Reaction Cuvette button.
Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision.

4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab

Figure 4-67 Reag. Probe tab

Button What it does


Above Wash Well Click this button and the reagent probe move to a
position above the wash well.
Above Inner Circle Click this button and the reagent probe will move to a
position above inner circle of the reagent disk.
Into Inner Circle Click this button and the reagent probe will lower into
the reagent tube in the inner circle and stop when it
contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Above Outer Circle Click this button and the reagent probe will move to a
position above the outer circle of the reagent disk.
Into Outer Circle Click this button and the reagent probe will lower into
the reagent tube in the outer circle and stop when it
contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.

4-157
Advanced Operations

Button What it does


Above Reaction Disk Click this button and reagent probe will move to a
position above the dispensing hole of the reaction
disk.
Into Reaction Cuvette Click this button and the reagent probe will lower into
the reaction cuvette and stop when it contacts the
liquid surface or the reaction cuvette bottom.

NOTE:
Ensure the reagent disk is placed in the home position or stopped at
certain reagent position before clicking Into Inner Circle or Into Outer
Circle button. Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision.
Ensure the reaction disk is placed in the home position or stopped at
certain cuvette position before clicking Into Reaction Cuvette button.
Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision.

4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab

Figure 4-68 Mix. Bar tab

Button What it does


Above Wash Well Click this button and the mixing bar will move to a
position above the wash well.
Into Wash Well Click this button and the mixing bar will lower into the
wash well.

4-158
Advanced Operations

Button What it does


To Reaction Disk Click this button and the mixing bar will move to a
position above the mixing hole of the reaction disk.
Into Reaction Cuvette Click this button and the mixing bar will lower into the
reaction cuvette.
Mix Enter the desired integer into the edit box to the right
of Time and click the Mix button to lower the mixing
bar into the reaction cuvette and mix the specified
time (expressed in terms of units and every unit
stands for 20ms).

NOTE:
Ensure the reaction disk is placed in the home position or stopped at
certain cuvette position before clicking Into Reaction Cuvette or Mix
button. Otherwise, it may lead to bar collision.

4.4.6.4 Reac. Disk tab

Figure 4-69 Reac. Disk tab

4-159
Advanced Operations

Button What it does


Rotate to Given Position Enter the desired number into the edit box below
Circles to specify how many circles the reaction
disk should run. Enter the desired number (1-80)
into the edit box below Position to specify at
which cuvette position the reaction disk should
stop.
Click this button and the reaction disk will rotate
the given circles and stop at the given position.
Rotate the Given Positions Enter the desired number (1-80) into the edit box
below Position to specify how many cuvette
positions the reaction disk should rotate.
Click this button and the reaction disk will rotate
the given positions.

NOTE:
Before operating the reaction disk, ensure the sample and reagent
probes and mixing bar are away from it. Otherwise, the moving disk
may bend the probes or bar.

4.4.6.5 Reag. Disk tab

Figure 4-70 Reag. Disk tab

4-160
Advanced Operations

Button What it does


Rotate to Given Position Enter the desired number into the edit box
below Circles to specify how many circles the
reagent disk should run. Enter the desired
number (1-50) into the edit box below Position
to specify at which position the reagent disk
should stop.
Click this button and the reagent disk will rotate
the given circles and stop at the given position.
Rotate the Given Positions Enter the desired number (1-50) into the edit
box below Position to specify how many
positions the reagent disk should rotate.
Click this button and the reagent disk will rotate
the given positions.

NOTE:
Before operating the reagent disk, ensure the reagent probe is away
from it. Otherwise, the moving disk may bend the probes.

4.4.6.6 Sam. Disk tab

Figure 4-71 Sam. Disk tab

4-161
Advanced Operations

Button What it does


Rotate to Given Position Enter the desired number into the edit box
below Circles to specify how many circles the
sample disk should run. Enter the desired
number (1-60) into the edit box below Position
to specify at which position the sample disk
should stop.
Click this button and the sample disk will rotate
the given circles and stop at the given position.
Rotate the Given Positions Enter the desired number (1-60) into the edit
box below Position to specify how many
positions the sample disk should rotate.
Click this button and the sample disk will rotate
the given positions.

NOTE:
Before operating the sample disk, ensure the sample probe is away
from it. Otherwise, the moving disk may bend the probe.

4.4.6.7 Fluid Sys. tab

Figure 4-72 Fluid Sys. tab

4-162
Advanced Operations

Button What it does


Wash Sample Probe Select Exterior or Interior from the pull down list to
the right of this button and click it to wash the
exterior or interior of the sample probe.
Wash Reagent Probe Select Exterior or Interior from the pull down list to
the right of this button and click it to wash the
exterior or interior of the reagent probe.
Wash Mixing Bar Click it to wash the exterior of the mixing bar.
Sam. Syringe Aspirate Enter the desired number (3-45) into the edit box
below Sam. Syr.Asp./Disp.Vol..
Click this button and the sample syringe aspirates
the given volume (µl).
Sam. Syringe Dispense Enter the desired number (3-45) into the edit box
below Sam. Syr.Asp./Disp.Vol..
Click this button and the sample syringe dispenses
the given volume (µl).
Reset Sam. Syringe Click this button and reset the sample syringe.
Reag. Syringe Aspirate Enter the desired number (30-450) into the edit box
below Reag. Syr.Asp./Disp.Vol..
Click this button and the reagent syringe aspirates
the given volume (µl).
Reag. Syringe Dispense Enter the desired number (30-450) into the edit box
below Reag. Syr.Asp./Disp.Vol..
Click this button and the reagent syringe dispenses
the given volume (µl).
Reset Reag. Syringe Click this button and reset the reagent syringe.

NOTE:
When you have clicked the Sam. Syringe Dispense button, if there is
no enough liquid inside the sample syringe, the plunger will stop at the
home position.
When you have clicked the Reag. Syringe Dispense button, if there is
no enough liquid inside the reagent syringe, the plunger will stop at the
home position.

4-163
Advanced Operations

4.4.6.8 Cuv. Compt. tab

Figure 4-73 Cuv. Compt. tab

Button What it does


Load Cuvette Segment Click the button and the trolley of the cuvette loader
should move to the loading position to load a new
cuvette segment.

4-164
Advanced Operations

4.4.6.9 Lamp tab

Figure 4-74 Lamp tab

Button What it does


Lamp On Click this button to turn on the lamp of the
photometer.
Lamp Off Click this button to turn off the lamp of the
photometer.

NOTE:
If nothing is to be run for a while and you have no intention to exit the
control system, you can turn off the lamp to maximize its service life.

4-165
Advanced Operations

4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab

Figure 4-75 Manipulator tab

Button What it does


Load Segment Select the desired segment position from the pull
down list below Select Segment Position and click
this button to load a cuvette segment to the given
position in the reaction disk.
Start Manipulator Select the desired motions from the pull down list
below Select motions and click this button to start
the manipulator.
Unload Segment Select the desired segment position from the pull
down list below Select Segment Position and click
this button to unload a cuvette segment from the
given position in the reaction disk.
To Vertical Home Click this button to move the manipulator vertically to
its initial point.
To Horizontal Home Click this button to move the manipulator horizontally
to its initial point.

4-166
Advanced Operations

4.4.6.11 Others tab

Figure 4-76 Others tab

Button What it does


Download Settings If the communication between the analyzing unit and
the operation unit is failed, you can download the
settings to the analyzing unit by clicking this button.
The operation unit will try to resume the
communication with the analyzing unit.
Reset Mechanical Parts Click this button to reset all the mechanical parts of
the analyzing unit.

4.4.7 Print
The Printing Setup screen is where you set the parameters regarding printing
reports.

To enter the Printing Setup screen, click System → Print, or press CTRL + O.

4-167
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-77 Printing Setup screen

At the Printing Setup screen, Figure 4-77, there are four tabs:

Report – defines parameters regarding the format of the patient report.


Test info. – defines items to appear on the printed test report.
Others – defines printing order and printer.
Report Header – defines the report header.

4.4.7.1 Report tab

Figure 4-78 Report tab

As Figure 4-78 shows, the items listed in the Required field are required to appear
on the patient report; the items listed in the Optional field are selectable items and
you can select any interested items to print on the patient report.

4-168
Advanced Operations

To set the items to appear on the patient report

1 Tick the check boxes to the left of the desired items. Clicking the ticked
check box again can cancel the selection.

2 Click the Setup button and a dialog box will pop up to tell you settings are
saved. Click the OK button to close the box.

To exit the Printing Setup screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.

4.4.7.2 Test Info. tab

Figure 4-79 Test Info. tab

4-169
Advanced Operations

As Figure 4-79 shows, the items listed in the Required field are required to appear
on the test report; the items listed in the Optional field are selectable items and you
can select any interested items to print on the report.

To set the items to appear on the test report

1 Tick the check boxes to the left of the desired items. Clicking the ticked
check box again can cancel the selection.

2 Click the Setup button and a dialog box will pop up to tell you settings are
saved. Click the OK button to close the box.

To exit the Printing Setup screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.

4-170
Advanced Operations

4.4.7.3 Others tab

Figure 4-80 Others tab

To set the printing order

1 Select the desired test.

2 Select the desired sequence number from the pull down list above.

3 Click Set Printing Order.

To set the default printer

1 Select the desired printer from the pull down list below Select.

4-171
Advanced Operations

2 Click the Default Printer button to set the selected printer as the default
printer.

To exit the Printing Setup screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.

4.4.7.4 Report Header tab

Figure 4-81 Report Header tab

NOTE:
The format of the printout may not be exactly the same as that
displayed in the print preview window.

To set the content and font of the report header

1 Enter the desired header into the edit box to the right of Header.
2 Select the desired font from the pull down list to the right of Font.
3 Click the Setup button and a dialog box will pop up to tell you the settings
that have been saved. Click the OK button to close the box.

To exit the Printing Setup screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.

4-172
Advanced Operations

4.4.8 Temperature
Click System→ Temperature or press CTRL + T and a dialog box will pop up, as
Figure 4-82 shows, to ask you whether you want to debug the temperature control
unit or check the temperature curve.

Figure 4-82 A dialog box to ask you whether to debug or to view curves

Click the No button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter
appropriate username and password, as Figure 4-83 shows.

CAUTION:
Only service engineers are authorized to debug the temperature
control unit.

Figure 4-83 A dialog box to ask you to enter username and password

Enter the administrator username and password as required to enter the


Temperature Control Curve screen, as Figure 4-84 shows.

4-173
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-84 Temperature Control Curve screen

As Figure 4-84 shows, you can see two tabs at the Temperature Control Curve
screen:

Preheating tab - displays temperature curve of preheating the reagents.


Reaction Disk tab - displays the temperature curve of the reaction disk.

For every temperature curve, its x-axis represents the time and y-axis the
temperature.

The parameters are interpreted as follows.

Parameter What it does How to set


Precision Defines the display Select one of the nine
precision of the options (0.01, 0.02, 0.05,
temperature. 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2 and 5)
from the pull down list.
Range Defines the display range Enter the lower limit into the
of the y-axis of the first edit box and the upper
temperature curve. limit into the second.

To check the current temperature curve

1 Select the desired temperature precision in the right of Precision.


2 Enter the desired display range in the right of Range.
3 Click the Save button.

To check the previous temperature curve

1 Click the History button.

4-174
Advanced Operations

2 Click or button until the desired curve is reached.

NOTE:
Click to check the previous curve;

Click to check the next curve.

3 Enter the desired display range in the right of Precision.


4 Enter the desired display range in the right of Range.
5 Click the Save button to check the curve.
6 When you have viewed the curve, click the History button to quit viewing
the history curve.

To lock a curve

1 Click the Lock Curve button to lock the currently displayed curve.

To unlock a curve

1 Click the Unlock Curve button to unlock the currently locked curve.

To exit the Temperature Control Curve screen

1 Click the Close button to exit the Temperature Control Curve screen.

4.4.9 Database
Click System → Database or press CTRL + L and a dialog box will pop up, as
Figure 4-85 shows, to ask you to enter the appropriate user name and password.

Figure 4-85 A dialog box to ask you enter the user name and password

Enter the user name and password of the administrator authority to enter the
Database Maintenance screen as Figure 4-86 shows.

4-175
Advanced Operations

Figure 4-86 Database Maintenance screen

NOTE:
You can only maintain the database when the analyzer is on standby.
This analyzer automatically backs up data. You only need to maintain
the database when the system alerts you that the database is
damaged.
Usually you do not need to delete the reaction curves. Deleting the
curves (only curves, not the results) only when you find insufficient
space left on the hard disk.

To repair and compress current database

1 When the analyzer warns you about database damage, click the Repair
and Compress button to repair and compress current database.

To delete certain reaction curve

1 Select the desired start date from the pull down list to the right of the
Start.
2 Select the desired end date from the pull down list to the right of the End.
3 Click the Delete certain reaction curve data button to delete the curve of
the selected period.

To delete all the reaction curves

1 Click the Delete all reaction curve data button to delete all the curves.

To exit the Database Maintenance screen

1 Click the Close button or the button at the upper right corner to exit
the Database Maintenance screen.

4-176
Advanced Operations

4.5 Help

Help Version

Guide

4.5.1 Version
Click Help→ Version or press CTRL + S to enter the Software version screen, as
the following figure shows.

Figure 4-87 Software version screen

Click the Close button to exit the Software Version screen.

4.5.2 Guide
Click Help→ Guide or press CTRL + F11 to view the on-line help document.

4-177
5 Maintenance
To ensure reliability, good performance and long service life of the system, regular
maintenance is required. Be sure to follow the instructions given below to maintain
the system. In case of problems beyond your ability or not covered in this chapter, be
sure to call Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor in time.

WARNING:
Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described
in this chapter.
Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures can damage your
system, void any applicable warranty or service contract and even
cause personnel injuries.
After performing any maintenance actions or procedures, ensure
that the system runs normally.
For some maintenance actions or procedures, be sure to place the
POWER to OFF first.
Do not spill water or detergent on the mechanical or electrical
components of the system.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing.

To ensure maintenance is performed periodically, Mindray recommends the copy of


the maintenance log in 5.7 Maintenance Log be used to keep the maintenance
records.

5.1 Preparation
The following things may facilitate your maintenance.

Tools

M1.5, M3 and/or M4 hex wrenches


Cross-headed screwdrivers (small, medium and large)
Syringe
A clean cup
Tweezers
Clean gauze
Clean cotton stick
Brush (to wash tanks)

5-1
Maintenance

Detergents

Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid


Alkaline: 0.5% (V/V) javel water

NOTE:
Do not mix the acid detergent with the alkali one.
Be sure to use the detergents recommended by Mindray. Otherwise,
proper result may not be obtained.

Others

Ethanol
Disinfector

5.2 Daily Maintenance

5.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes


Follow the procedure given below to check the sample or reagent syringe. The
purpose of this check is to ensure the syringe does not leak.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the middle door of the analyzing unit and you will see both of the
syringes, the sample syringe on the right and the reagent syringe on the
left.

T-piece

Plunger Guide Cap

5-2
Maintenance

3 Check whether the T-piece leaks.


If not, proceed to the next step.
If so, contact Mindray Custom Service Department or the distributor.
4 Check whether the plunger guide cap leaks.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If so, replace the cap as instructed by 5.6.6 Replacing Plunger
Assembly of Sample/Reagent Syringe .
5 Close the middle door.

5.2.2 Checking/Washing Sample Probe


At every startup, the system will automatically wash the interior and exterior of the
sample probe with deionized water. At every shutdown, the system will automatically
wash the interior and exterior of the sample probe with the acid and alkaline
detergents.

During the washing process, check whether the flow from the interior of the sample
probe is continuous and in the direction of the probe; check the exterior of the
sample probe to see whether the flow is continuous and normal.

If the flow appears abnormal, wash the probe as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing
Sample Probe.

If the flow remains abnormal after washing, clean the probe as instructed by 5.6.1
Unclogging Sample Probe.

If the flow remains abnormal after cleaning, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.

5.2.3 Checking/Washing Reagent Probe


At every startup, the system will automatically wash the interior and exterior of the
reagent probe with deionized water. At every shutdown, the system will automatically
wash the interior and exterior of the reagent probe with the acid and alkaline
detergents.

During the washing process, check whether the flow from the interior of the reagent
probe is continuous and in the direction of the probe; check the exterior of the
reagent probe to see whether the flow is continuous and normal.

If the flow appears abnormal, wash the probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing
Reagent Probe.

If the flow remains abnormal after washing, clean the probe as instructed by 5.6.2
Unclogging Reagent Probe.

If the flow remains abnormal after cleaning, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.

5-3
Maintenance

5.2.4 Checking/Washing Mixing Bar


At every startup, the system will automatically wash the mixing bar with deionized
water. At every shutdown, the system will automatically wash the mixing bar with the
acid and alkaline detergents.

During the washing process, check whether the bar rotates normally. If not, contact
Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.

5.2.5 Checking Detergents

WARNING:
Always wear gloves when checking the detergents.

1 Make sure the system is on standby status, and ensure no part of the
system will motion.
2 Remove the cover from the reagent disk.
3 Check how much detergent left in the bottle on position 45. If there is not
much left, add more detergent or install a new bottle of detergent.
4 Check how much detergent left in the bottle on position 47. If there is not
much left, add more detergent or install a new bottle of detergent.
5 Replace the cover.

Every wash consumes about 450µl detergent when the system uses detergent to
clean the probes and the mixing bar.

5.2.6 Checking Connection of Deionized Water


1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will find the deionized
water tank on the right.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

5-4
Maintenance

3 Check the connections between the two deionized water connectors (green
and red) and their counterparts on the analyzer.

Deionized Water Connector Deionized Water Connector


(Green) (Red) BNC Connector

Pickup Tube

If not, jump to step 5.


If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and proceed to the next
step.
4 Check whether the connectors are loose.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If so, pinch the connector with fingers and screw it counter-clockwise to
remove it and then screw it back on.
5 Check the connections between the pickup tubes and their connectors.
If not, go directly to the next step.
If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and tighten the
connections and proceed to the next step.
6 Pull out the extractable plate.
7 Check the connection between the pickup tube and the tank cap.
If not, go directly to the next step.
If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and tighten the
connection and proceed to the next step.
8 Push the extractable plate back in.
9 Close the lower door.

CAUTION:
Make sure the deionized water pickup tubes are neither blocked nor
bent.

NOTE:
If leaking remains, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.

5-5
Maintenance

5.2.7 Checking Connection of Wastewater

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the following checks.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will find the waste tank
on the left.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

3 Check the connections between waste connector and the waste tap of the
analyzing unit.

BNC Connector Waste Connector

Pin

Waste Tap
Waste Tube

If no leaks, go directly to the next step.


If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and then press the
pin on the tap and grab the tap and pull it off the connector. Keep pressing
the pin and re-insert the connector back to the tap and proceed to the next
step.
4 Check the connection between the waste tube and the tap.
If no leaks, go directly to the next step.
If you see leaks, wipe them off with clean gauze and tighten the waste
tube and then proceed to the next step.
5 Pull out the extractable plate.

5-6
Maintenance

6 Check the connection between the waste tube and the tank cap.
If no leaks, go directly to the next step.
If you see leaks, wipe them off with clean gauze and tighten the
connection and proceed to the next step.
7 Push the extractable plate back in.
8 Close the lower door.

CAUTION:
Ensure the waste tube is neither blocked nor bent. A blocked or bent
waste tube may lead to waste overflow that may damage the analyzing
unit.

NOTE:
If leaking remains, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.

5.2.8 Checking Remaining Deionized Water

CAUTION:
The deionized water to be used on the BS-300 must meet the CAP
Type II water requirements and the resistance rate must be no less
than 0.5MΩ·cm.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the deionized
water tank on the right.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

3 Check how much deionized water left in the tank.


If there is still enough left, jump to step 9.
If not, proceed to the next step.
4 Pull out the extractable plate.

5-7
Maintenance

5
CAUTION:
After removing the cap of the deionized water tank (together
with the pickup tube and level sensor), place it on a clean
table.

Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the tank cap and remove the cap together
with the pickup tube and the level sensor.
6 Add deionized water to the tank.
7 Screw (clockwise) the cap together with the pickup tube and the level
sensor back on to the tank until secure.
8 Push the extractable plate back in.
9 Close the lower door.

CAUTION:
Ensure the deionized water pickup tube is neither blocked nor bent.

5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.
Dispose of the wastewater in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer
or distributor of the reagents for details.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the waste tank
on the left.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

3 Pull out the extractable plate.

5-8
Maintenance

4
BIOHAZARD:
After removing the cap of the waste tank (together with the
tube and level sensor), place it on an appropriate place to
avoid biohazard contamination.

Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the tank cap and remove it together with the
waste tube and the level sensor from the tank.
5 Take out the tank and empty it.
6 Replace the tank back into the cabinet.
7 Screw (clockwise) the cap (together with the waste tube and the level
sensor) back onto the tank until secure.
8 Push the extractable plate back in.
9 Close the lower door.

CAUTION:
Ensure the waste tube is neither blocked nor bent. A blocked or bent
waste tube may lead to wastewater overflow that may damage the
analyzer.

5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.
Dispose of the used cuvettes in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the
used-cuvettes bucket in the middle.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

3 Take out the bucket and empty it.

5-9
Maintenance

4 Replace the bucket back into the cabinet.


5 Close the lower door.

5.3 Weekly Maintenance

5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the probe.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Remove the cover from the sample disk. Shift the disk handle from
horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and
pull the disk upward to remove it.

3 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the probe
arm to a position above the sample compartment and convenient to
operate.

5-10
Maintenance

4
CAUTION:
The tweezers may scratch the probe. Exercise caution when
using it to wash the probe. Avoid direct contact between the
tweezers and the probe. Do not use excessive force when
washing the probe. Otherwise it may bend.

Pinch acid or alkaline detergent-soaked (ethanol-soaked also applicable)


gauze with tweezers and gently clean the exterior of the sample probe
until it is clean and smooth.

NOTE:
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline detergents be
used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid
detergent was used for last cleaning, the alkaline detergent
would better be used for this time.

5 Pinch deionized water-soaked gauze to wash the sample probe.


6 After washing, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
probe arm to move the probe to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After washing the probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a
position above the wash well.

7 Keep the sample disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole
of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the sample disk all the way down.
Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the
disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk
to the rotor.
To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently
pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you
can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
8 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON and the system will
automatically reset the sample probe and wash it with deionized water.

5-11
Maintenance

5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the probe.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Remove the cover from the reagent disk. Shift the disk handle from
horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and
pull the disk upward to remove it.

3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the probe
arm to a position above the reagent compartment and convenient to
operate.

5-12
Maintenance

4
CAUTION:
The tweezers can scratch the probe. Exercise caution when
using it to wash the probe. Avoid direct contact between the
tweezers and the probe. Do not use excessive force when
washing the probe. Otherwise it may bend.

Pinch acid or alkaline detergent-soaked (ethanol-soaked also applicable)


gauze with tweezers and gently clean the exterior of the reagent probe
until it is clean and smooth.

NOTE:
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline detergents be
used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid
detergent was used for last cleaning, the alkaline detergent
would better be used for this time.

5 Pinch deionized water-soaked gauze to wash the reagent probe.


6 After washing, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
probe arm to move the probe to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After washing the probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a
position above the wash well.

7 Keep the reagent disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole
of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the reagent disk all the way down.
Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the
disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk
to the rotor.
To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently
pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you
can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
8 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON and the system will
automatically reset the reagent probe and wash it with deionized water.

5-13
Maintenance

5.3.3 Washing Mixing Bar

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the probe.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Pull the mixing bar arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the bar arm to
a position convenient to operate.

3
CAUTION:
The tweezers can scratch the bar. Exercise caution when
using the tweezers to wash the bar. Avoid direct contact
between the tweezers and the bar. Do not use excessive
force when washing the bar. Otherwise it may bend.

Pinch acid or alkaline detergent-soaked (ethanol-soaked also applicable)


gauze with tweezers and gently clean the exterior of the mixing bar until it
is clean and smooth.

NOTE:
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline detergents be
used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid
detergent was used for last cleaning, the alkaline detergent
would better be used for this time.

5-14
Maintenance

4 Pinch deionized water-soaked gauze to wash the mixing bar.


5 After washing, gently pull the bar arm to its highest point and rotate the bar
arm to move the bar to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After washing the bar, be sure to rotate the bar to a position
above the wash well.

6 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON and the system will


automatically reset the mixing bar and wash it with deionized water.

CAUTION:
The mixing bar is precisely fabricated. Replace the scratched or bent
bar once finding it. Refer to 5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar for details. .

5.3.4 Washing Deionized Water Tank

CAUTION:
The deionized water to be used on the BS-300 must meet the CAP
Type II water requirements and the resistance rate must be no less
than 0.5MΩ·cm.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the deionized
water tank on the right.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

3 Pull out the extractable plate.

5-15
Maintenance

4
CAUTION:
After removing the cap of the deionized water tank (together
with the pickup tube and level sensor), place it on a clean
table.

Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the cap (together with the deionized water


pickup tube and the level sensor).
5 Take out the deionized water tank.
6 Wash the tank interior with deionized water. Use a clean brush to clean the
interior if necessary.
7 Wash the pickup tube and the level sensor with deionized water. Use
clean gauze to wash them if necessary.
8 Wipe water off the tank exterior, pickup tube and sensor cable with clean
gauze.
9 Place the deionized water tank on the extractable plate.
10 Add deionized water into the tank.
11 Screw (clockwise) the cap (together with the pickup tube and level sensor)
back onto the tank until secure.
12 Push the extractable plate back in.
13 Close the lower door.

CAUTION:
Ensure the deionized water pickup tube is neither blocked nor bent.

5.3.5 Washing Waste Tank

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when washing the tank.
Exercise caution and do not spill the waste onto other people or things.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer
or distributor of the reagents for details.
Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.

5-16
Maintenance

2 Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the waste tank
on the left.

Deionized
Waste Tank
Water Tank

Used-Cuvettes
Bucket

Extractable
Plate

3 Pull out the extractable plate.


4
BIOHAZARD:
After removing the cap of the waste tank (together with the
tube and level sensor), place it on an appropriate place to
avoid biohazard contamination.

Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the cap (together with the waste tube and the
level sensor).
5 Take out the waste tank.
6 Empty the waste tank.
7 Wash the tank interior with clean water. Soak the tank with disinfector if
necessary.
8 Wash the waste tube and the level sensor with clean water.
9 Wipe water off the tank exterior, waste tube and sensor cable with clean
gauze.
10 Place the deionized water tank back onto the extractable plate.
11 Screw (clockwise) the cap (together with the waste tube and level sensor)
back onto the tank until secure.
12 Push the extractable plate back in.
13 Close the lower door.

CAUTION:
Ensure the waste tube is neither blocked nor bent. A blocked or bent
waste tube will lead to waste overflow that may damage the analyzing
unit.

5-17
Maintenance

5.3.6 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the
sample disk/compartment.
Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Remove the cover from the sample disk. Shift the disk handle from
horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and
pull the disk upward to remove it.

3 Wash the disk with clean water and wipe it dry with clean gauze.
4 Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean
the inside of the compartment.

5 Keep the sample disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole
of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the sample disk all the way down.
Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the
disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk
to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel
and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured
and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.

5-18
Maintenance

5.3.7 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the
reagent disk/compartment.
Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Remove the cover from the reagent disk. Shift the disk handle from
horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and
pull the disk upward to remove it.

3 Wash the disk with clean water and wipe it dry with clean gauze.
4 Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean
the inside of the compartment.

5 Keep the reagent disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole
of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the reagent disk all the way down.
Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the
disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk
to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel
and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured
and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.

5-19
Maintenance

5.3.8 Cleaning Panel of Analyzing Unit

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the panel
of analyzing unit.
Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Wipe the panel of the analyzing unit with clean gauze (water or
disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary).

5.4 Monthly Maintenance

5.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the wash
well.
Dispose of used cotton sticks in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Pull the sample probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the arm away from
the wash well.

5-20
Maintenance

3 Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton sticks.

4 Rotate the arm back to a position above the wash well.

5.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the wash
well.
Dispose of used cotton sticks in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Pull the reagent probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the arm away from
the wash well.
3 Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton sticks.

4 Rotate the arm back to a position above the wash well.

5-21
Maintenance

5.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Mixing Bar

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the wash
well.
Dispose of used cotton sticks in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Pull the mixing bar arm to its highest point. Rotate the arm away from the
wash well.
3 Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton sticks.

4 Rotate the arm back to a position above the wash well.

5.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the rotor.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.

5-22
Maintenance

2 Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.

5.4.5 Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the rotor.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.

5.4.6 Cleaning Mixing Bar Rotor

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

5-23
Maintenance

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the rotor.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.

5.5 Maintenance Every Six Months

Washing Dust Screens

1 Place the POWER to OFF.


2 Open the middle door.
3 Use a screwdriver to unscrew the screws fixing the dust screens on the
middle door and remove the screens.
4 Use a screwdriver to unscrew the three screws fixing the back cover and
open the back cover.

5-24
Maintenance

5 Use a screwdriver to unscrew the four screws fixing the screens on the
back cover and remove the screens.
6 Wash the screens with clean water.
7 Wipe the screens dry with clean gauze.
8 Install the screens back to the back cover and the middle door with
screws.
9 Close the middle door.
10 Close the back cover and fix it with three screws.

5.6 Irregular Maintenance

5.6.1 Unclogging Sample Probe


When the sample probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow the
steps given below to remove, unclog and install the sample probe.

5.6.1.1 Removing Sample Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when removing the
probe.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Remove the cover from the sample disk. Shift the disk handle from the
horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and
pull the disk upward to remove it.

5-25
Maintenance

3 Pull the sample probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a
position above the sample disk and convenient to operate.

4 Pinch the clips below the base of the sample probe arm and push it
upward to remove the arm cover.

5 Hold the probe’s fluid connector of probe with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other. Rotate tubing connector counter-clockwise until it
disconnects from the probe. Remove the tubing from the probe.

5-26
Maintenance

6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the probe’s circuit
connector from the board with the other hand.

CAUTION:
The probe arm is delicate. Exercise caution when
disconnecting the connector. Excessive force may damage
the connector and/or the circuit board.

7 Use a screwdriver to remove the retaining screw and take out the spring.

5-27
Maintenance

8
WARNING:
Save the removed probe at a safe place where it will neither
endanger people working around the area nor be damaged.

NOTE:
Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm
so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the
probe arm.

Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe will not drop out and if it does drop out, save it
at a clean place for later installation.

NOTE:
The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead
to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon
seeing. Refer to 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe for details.

5.6.1.2 Unclogging Sample Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when unclogging the
probe.
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Use a needle to unclog the probe from the tip.

CAUTION:
The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead
to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon
seeing. Refer to 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe for details.

5-28
Maintenance

5.6.1.3 Installing Sample Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when installing the probe.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Insert the probe back into the arm.
3 Replace the spring and screw the retaining screw back onto the probe.
4 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe
upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely. If so,
proceed to the next step; if not, check for errors and try again after
removing the errors.
5 Connect the probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Ensure the gasket is inside the probe.
7 Screw the probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.

CAUTION:
Exercise caution when connecting the probe. Excessive
force may bend the probe.

8 Add deionized water to a clean cup. Immerse the probe tip into the water
by 2-3mm and the LED on the circuit board should be lighted. Take the
probe tip out of water, and the LED should go out. If the test succeeds,
proceed to the next step; if not, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.

5-29
Maintenance

9 Replace the arm cover as follows: align the hole of pin of the arm cover to
the bump on the rear side (near the rotor) of the base; align the two clasps
of the arm cover to the two holes on the base; gently push the cover back
onto the base.

10 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe
upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely. If so,
proceed to the next step; if not, the cover is not properly installed. Remove
the cover and re-install it and try this step again.

11 Pull the sample probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a
position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate the probe
to a position above the wash well.

12 Keep the sample disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole
of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the sample disk all the way down.
Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the
disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk
to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel
and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured
and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
13 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON. The system will automatically
reset the probe and wash it with deionized water.

5-30
Maintenance

CAUTION:
The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead
to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon
seeing.

5.6.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe


When the reagent probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow the
steps given below to remove, unclog and install the reagent probe.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when removing the
probe.

5.6.2.1 Removing Reagent Probe

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Remove the cover from the reagent disk. Shift the disk handle from the
horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and
pull the disk upward to remove it.

3 Pull the reagent probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a
position above the reagent disk and convenient to operate.

5-31
Maintenance

4 Pinch the clips below the base of the reagent probe arm and push it
upward to remove the arm cover.

5 Hold the probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing connector
with the other. Rotate tubing connector counter-clockwise until it
disconnects from the probe. Remove the tubing from the probe.

6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the probe’s circuit
connector from the board with the other hand.

CAUTION:
The probe arm is delicate. Exercise caution when
disconnecting the connector. Excessive force may damage
the connector and/or the circuit board.

5-32
Maintenance

7 Use a screwdriver to remove the retaining screw and take out the spring.

8
WARNING:
Save the removed probe at a safe place where it will neither
endanger people working around the area nor be damaged.

NOTE:
Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm
so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the
probe arm.

Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe will not drop out and if it does drop out, save it
at a clean place for later installation.

NOTE:
The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead
to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon
seeing. Refer to 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe for details.

5.6.2.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when unclogging the
probe.
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

5-33
Maintenance

1 Use a needle to unclog the probe from the tip.

NOTE:
The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead
to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon
seeing. Refer to 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe for details.

5.6.2.3 Installing Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when installing the probe.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Insert the probe back into the arm.
3 Replace the spring and screw the retaining screw back onto the probe.
4 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe
upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely.
If so, proceed to the next step.
If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5 Connect the probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Ensure the gasket is inside the probe.

5-34
Maintenance

7
CAUTION:
You must shape the tubing inside the reagent probe arm into
a ring.

Exercise caution when connecting the probe. Excessive


force may bend the probe.

Screw the probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.


8 Add deionized water to a clean cup. Immerse the probe tip into the water
by 2-3mm and the LED on the circuit board will be lighted. Take the probe
tip out of water, and the LED will go out.
If the test succeeds, proceed to the next step.
If not, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the
distributor.

5-35
Maintenance

9 Replace the arm cover as follows: align the hole of pin of the arm cover to
the bump on the rear side (near the rotor) of the base; align the two clasps
of the arm cover to the two holes on the base; gently push the cover back
onto the base.

10 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe
upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely.
If so, proceed to the next step.
If not, the cover is not properly installed. Remove the cover and re-install it
and try this step again.

5-36
Maintenance

11 Pull the reagent probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a
position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate the probe
to a position above the wash well.

12 Keep the reagent disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole
of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the reagent disk all the way down.
Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the
disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk
to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel
and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured
and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
13 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON. The system will automatically
reset the probe and wash it with deionized water.

NOTE:
The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead
to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon
seeing. Refer to 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe for details.

5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe


If the sample probe is bent or damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the
procedure given below to replace the damaged or bent sample probe.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when replacing the
probe.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.

1 Remove the bent or damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.1.1 Removing


Sample Probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the bent or damaged sample probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.

5-37
Maintenance

2 Install a new probe as instructed by 5.6.1.3 Installing Sample Probe.

CAUTION:
After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate the probe
to a position above the wash well before installing the
sample disk.

5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe


If the reagent probe is bent or damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the
procedure given below to replace the damaged or bent reagent probe.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around
the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when replacing the
probe.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.

1 Remove the bent or damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.2.1 Removing


Reagent Probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the bent or damaged reagent probe in
accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal.

5-38
Maintenance

2 Install a new probe as instructed by 5.6.2.3 Installing Reagent Probe.

CAUTION:
You must shape the tubing inside the reagent probe arm into
a ring.

After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate the probe


to a position above the wash well before installing the
reagent disk.

5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar


If the mixing bar is damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the procedure
given below to replace the damaged mixing bar.

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working
around the probe.
When replacing the bar, pinch the bar only by the knurled part and do
not touch the other part of the bar. Protect the flat par of the mixing bar
from scratches.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when replacing the
mixing bar.
Dispose of the damaged mixing bar in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Prepare a new mixing bar. Wash the flat part of the new bar with
detergent-dipped gauze or cotton sticks and then wipe it dry with
deionized water-dipped gauze.

5-39
Maintenance

3 Gently pull the bar to its highest point and rotate it to a position convenient
to operate.

4 Pinch the bar with one hand and unscrew (counter-clockwise) the retaining
nut with the other until the mixing bar looses. Pull the bar downward to
remove it and remove the nut.

CAUTION:
When trying to pull out the bar, concentrate your force in the
direction of the axis on the bar arm. Biased force may
damage the bar and/or the axis.

5-40
Maintenance

5 Align the mixing bar to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently
screw it into the nut until the end of the bar is in line with the smaller hole
of the nut.

6 Pinch the mixing bar by the knurled part and align the hole of the nut to the
axis of the mixing bar and push the nut onto the bar until it reaches the
end of the bar. Tighten the nut (screw clock-wise) with the other hand.

CAUTION:
When trying to push the bar into the arm, concentrate your
force in the direction of the axis on the bar arm. Biased force
may damage the bar and/or the axis.
Ensure the bar is all the way pushed to the end.

7 After replacing the bar, visually check whether the bar is vertical to the bar
arm.
If yes, proceed to the next step.
If not, repeat step 5 to remove the bar and re-install it.
8 Pull the bar arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position above
its wash well.

CAUTION:
After installing the mixing bar, be sure to rotate the mixing
bar to a position above its wash well before turning on the
analyzing unit.

9 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON. The system will automatically
reset the bar and wash it with deionized water.
10 Follow the steps given below to do the position checks:
Enter the Maintenance screen and select the Mix. Bar tab as instructed
by 4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab.

5-41
Maintenance

Click Into Wash Well and observe whether the mixing bar is aligned to the
center of the wash well. If not, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.
Set the Time to 100 and click Mix. The bar should start to rotate after
enters the reaction cuvette. Observe whether the rotation is normal and
pay attention to abnormal sound. If the rotation is not normal or the
abnormal noise is heart, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or the distributor.

5.6.6 Replacing Plunger Assembly of Sample/Reagent Syringe


The plungers of sample and reagent syringes may be worn out after a certain period
of service. A worn-out plunger may lead to leaks, which will consequently result in
inaccurate aspiration and unreliable test results. You should check the syringes
everyday and replace the old plunger assembly with a new one when

The old one has served for three months; or


The old one has been used for over 100,000 tests; or
The old one is apparently damaged.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.
Exercise caution when installing the syringe. Excessive force may
crack the syringe.

Follow the procedure given below to replace the plunger assembly of sample or
reagent syringe.

5-42
Maintenance

1 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.


2 Open the middle door and you will see both of the syringes, the sample
syringe on the right and the reagent syringe on the left.

T-piece

Syringe Connector

Upper Retaining Screw

Space Bar

Syringe

Plunger Guide Cap

Holder
Plunger Button

Lower Retaining Screw

3 Prepare a new plunger assembly (shown in the figure below) and soak the
plunger tip in deionized water to eliminate bubbles.

Plunger Tip Plunger Rod Plunger Button


Plunger Guide Cap

4 Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the two upper retaining screws of the syringe


and remove the screws and the space bar.
5 Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the lower retaining screw of the syringe and
remove the syringe from the holder.
6
CAUTION:
There may be residual water in the syringe. Exercise caution
when removing it. Do not drop water onto the analyzing unit.

Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand and unscrew (counter-clockwise) the syringe.

5-43
Maintenance

7
CAUTION:
There may be residual water in the syringe. Exercise caution
when pulling the plunger assembly out. Do not drop water onto
the analyzing unit.
The plunger rod of the sample syringe is slender. Exercise
caution when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.

Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the plunger guide cap and pinch the plunger
button to gently pull the plunger assembly from the syringe.

Syringe Connector Syringe Plunger Guide Plunger Rod Plunger Button


Cap

8
CAUTION:
The plunger rod of the sample syringe is slender. Exercise
caution when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.

Pinch the new plunger assembly by the plunger button and carefully insert
the plunger tip into the syringe and push it all the way to the end. Screw
(clockwise) the plunger guide cap until secure.
9 Immerse the syringe connector into deionized water. Pinch the plunger
button, pull it to aspirate half syringe of deionized water and then push it to
expel the deionized water and the air from the syringe.
10 Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand. Screw (clockwise) the syringe into the T-piece until secure.
11 Place the syringe on the holder.
12 Install the space bar and two upper retaining screws. Note that do not
tighten the screws now.
13 Align the plunger button to the lower retaining screw of the plunger and
screw (clockwise) the screw until secure.
14 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe. Mindray recommends the
upper edge of the space bar reach the fourth line (the 4µl line of the sample
reagent, or the 40µl line of the reagent syringe) of the scale on the syringe.
15 Tighten the two upper retaining screws.
16 Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER back to ON.

5-44
Maintenance

17 Enter the System Maintenance screen and set the Sam.


Syr.Asp./Disp.Vol.. or Reag. Syr.Asp./Disp.Vol. to the maximum value(45
for the sample syringe and 450 for the reagent syringe ). Click Sam.
Syringe Aspirate or Reag. Syringe Aspirate and the syringe should start
aspirating. After the syringe finishes the motion, click Sam. Syringe
Dispense or Reag. Syringe Dispense and the syringe should start
expelling. You may repeat this action several times. Refer to 4.4.6.7 Fluid
Sys. tab for details. Pay attention to bubbles during the
aspiration/dispensing process.
Go to the next step if no bubble is found.
If there are bubbles observed during the process, they may be caused by
the air leak between the syringe and the T-piece. Uninstall the syringe and
re-install it. If the bubbles are found again, please contact Mindray
Customer Service Department or the distributor.
18 Close the middle door.

5.6.7 Replacing Lamp


The lamp of the photometric system ages after a certain period of service. An aged
lamp may introduce extra noise to the analyzing process. Replace the lamp with a
new one when the system reminds you to do so, or the service time of the lamp has
added up to 1,000 hours.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.

NOTE:
Do not touch either the light entrance of the lamp housing or the lens in
front of the lamp. In case the entrance is dirty, clean it with
ethanol-soaked defatted cotton.

1 Place the POWER to OFF. Wait at least 30 minutes for the lamp and its
housing to cool down.

WARNING:
After working for a while, the lamp and its housing are
usually hot enough to burn you. Do not proceed with this
procedure until they have cooled down.

5-45
Maintenance

2 Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the three retaining screws on the upper part


of the back of the analyzing unit and open the upper part.

3 Unscrew the two lower screws on the back of the lamp housing and
remove the radiator from the housing.

4 Pinch the lamp base with one hand and press the lever on the left of the
base.

5 Pinch the new lamp by its base and insert the lamp pins into the mounting
holes, the larger pin into the larger hole and the smaller pin into the
smaller hole, on the base.
6 Replace the radiator and tighten the screws.

5-46
Maintenance

7 Close the upper part of the back of the analyzing unit and tighten the
screws.

5.7 Maintenance Log


See the following tables for the parts to be maintained and the maintenance
schedules. Please copy them every month and place a check mark in each day
column for the maintenance items in the list after performing maintenance.

5-47
Maintenance

Daily Maintenance Month:——— Year:———


Maintenance Record
Daily Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Checking Sample Syringe
2 Checking Reagent Syringe
3 Checking/Washing Sample Probe
4 Checking/Washing Reagent Probe
5 Checking/Washing Mixing Bar
6 Checking Detergents
7 Checking Connection of Deionized Water
8 Checking Connection of Wastewater
9 Checking Remaining Deionized Water
10 Emptying Waste Tank
11 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket

Weekly Maintenance Month:——— Year:———


Maintenance Record
Weekly Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Washing Sample Probe
2 Washing Reagent Probe
3 Washing Mixing Bar
4 Washing Deionized Water Tank
5 Washing Waste Tank
6 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment
7 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment
8 Cleaning Panel of Analyzing Unit

5-48
Maintenance

Monthly Maintenance Month:——— Year:———


Maintenance Record
Monthly Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe
2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe
3 Cleaning Wash Well of Mixing Bar
4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor
5 Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor
6 Cleaning Mixing Bar Rotor

Maintenance Every Six Months Month:——— Year:———


Maintenance Record
Maintenance Every Six Months
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Washing Dust Screens

Irregular Maintenance Month:——— Year:———


Maintenance Record
Irregular Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Unclogging Sample Probe
2 Unclogging Reagent Probe
3 Replacing Sample Probe
4 Replacing Reagent Probe
5 Replacing Mixing Bar
Replacing Plunger Assembly of
6
Sample/Reagent Syringe
7 Replacing Lamp

5-49
6 Troubleshooting
This chapter presents all error messages and recommended measures, which
should be taken in time once any error occurs.

If the recommended measures fail to solve the problems, contact Mindray Customer
Service Department or your local distributor.

When an error occurs, its corresponding error message will be displayed on the
lower left side of the screen, as Figure 6-1 shows.

The log will record the time, level, code and message of every error (except for the
level-11 error) to facilitate you to troubleshoot the analyzer. Refer to 4.4.5 Log for
details about the log.

Figure 6-1 Error messages are displayed on the lower left side of the screen

6.1 Classification of Error Messages


The error messages are classified as various levels according to their severity.

6-1
Troubleshooting

Severity: Warning

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


0 Negligible errors The analyzer will alert the operator without
further treatment.
1 Errors to be flagged The analyzer will flag the affected analysis so
that the operator knows something went
wrong during the analysis.
2 Errors to invalidate an The analyzer will invalidate the abnormal
analysis analysis and re-run the test.
20 Errors caused by The analyzer will ignore the related analyses
unavailable samples and proceed to other ones. When other
analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause
so that the operator can load the missing
samples to the sample disk.
Seeing this message, you can also press the

button and load the missing samples


before continuing the analysis.
3 Errors to invalidate The analyzer will invalidate the analysis and
reagents re-run the test.
30 Errors caused by The analyzer will ignore the related analyses
unavailable reagents and proceed to other ones. When other
analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause
so that the operator can load the missing
reagents to the sample disk.
Seeing this message, you can also press the

button and load the missing reagents


before continuing the analysis.
31 Errors to invalidate all /
the analyses related
to the reagent or
sample associated
with the instruction

Severity: Putting certain units on hold

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


4 Errors caused by the The analyzer will pause dispensing the
sample disk assembly samples. All the analyses whose samples
and the sample have already been dispensed will be analyzed
dispenser as programmed. The other analyses will be
invalidated. When all the analyses are
finished, the analyzer will pause.

6-2
Troubleshooting

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


5 Errors caused by the The analyzer will pause dispensing the
reagent disk reagents. All the analyses whose reagents
assembly and the (both the first and second reagents) have
reagent dispenser already been dispensed will be analyzed as
programmed. The other analyses will be
invalidated. When all the analyses are
finished, the analyzer will pause.
6 Errors caused by The analyzer will use all the remaining
cuvette loader only cuvettes and finish all the analyses on the
(reaction disk not reaction disk. When all the analyses are
affected) finished, the analyzer will pause.
7 Errors affecting the The analyzer will put all the sample and
sample disk and reagent dispensing on hold. The analyses
reagent disk only whose samples or reagents have been
(reaction disk not dispensed will be conducted as programmed
affected) and the other analyses will be invalidated.
When the analyses are finished, the analyzer
will pause.

Severity: Stopping the analyzer

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


8 Errors caused by the The analyzer will send the self-test
reaction disk instructions and place the mechanical parts in
assembly their home positions in the next period. If the
analyzer can be reset within the period, the
analyzer will proceed with the remaining
analyses; otherwise, the analyzer will stop.

Severity: Emergency stop

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


9 / The analyzer will not make any movement in
the next period. The error status will be
reserved. All the remaining analyses will be
invalidated. You can operate the analyzer for
other purposes such as printing and reviewing
results.

Severity: Prohibiting analyses

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


10 / The analyzer will prohibit any operation
regarding analyses. But you can use the
control system for such purposes as
reviewing data.

6-3
Troubleshooting

Severity: Prohibiting startup

Level Definition Actions taken by the analyzer


11 / The control system cannot be started or is
terminated. The operation unit (computer)
exits the control system to the Windows
operating system.

NOTE:
All errors except for those of level 11 will be recorded in the log. When
a level-11 error occurs, the operating system will display the error
message and exit the system software after the error is confirmed by
the operator.

6.2 Corrective Measures


In case of an error, enter the log to check the error code. Based on the error code,
check the table below for recommended corrective measures.

WARNING:
When troubleshooting the analyzer, first find out whether it is
necessary to switch off the POWER or ANALYZING UNIT POWER.
Wear gloves, goggles and lab coat if necessary.

6-4
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


100000001 MUI Response Error: Parity error. 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

100000002 MUI Response Error: Instruction too long. 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000003 MUI Response Error: Incomplete instruction. 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000004 MUI Response Error: Check sum error. 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

100000005 MUI Response Error: Downloading parameter. Can't 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
respond to other instructions.
100000006 MUI Response Error: Data at byte 00-0x7F exceed 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
0x7F.

100960100 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Illegal frame 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
type.

100960101 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. No this unit's 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command.

100960102 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Illegal 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command identity.
100960103 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Parameter 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
significant bits wrong

100960104 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Instruction 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
length wrong.
100960105 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Sample 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
position not within 1-60

100960106 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Reagent 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
position not within 1-50

100960107 MU Execution Error: Wrong command. Other 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter error.

6-5
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


100960200 MU Execution Error: MU self-test error. 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

100960300 MU Execution Error: MU handshaking with sub-unit. 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Can't respond to other instructions.
100960500 MU Execution Error: MU calling sub-unit to reset and 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
self-test. Can't respond to other instructions.

100960900 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Self-test.

100960901 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Failed.

100960902 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Handshake.

100960903 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Reset.

100960904 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Shutdown.
100960905 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Free.

100960906 MU Execution Error: MU work status not supporting 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Mechanical reset.

100961000 MU Execution Error: MU busy. Can't respond to current 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction.

100961100 MU Execution Error: Disassemble instruction wrong. 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

100961200 MU Execution Error: Attempted undefined system 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
operation.

6-6
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


100961400 MU Execution Error: Attempted undefined inquiry. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

100961500 MU Execution Error: Wrong parameter for inquiry. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961600 MU Execution Error: Attempted to configure undefined 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter.
100961800 MU Execution Error: Attempted to configure undefined 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
procedure.
100961900 MU Execution Error: Wrong parameter for procedure 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
configuration.

100962000 MU Execution Error: E2PROM R/W wrong. Read error. 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

100962001 MU Execution Error: E2PROM R/W wrong. Write error. 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100962002 MU Execution Error: E2PROM R/W wrong. Check sum 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
error.

100962003 MU Execution Error: E2PROM R/W wrong. Download 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
error.

100969000 MU Execution Error: Execution result not received 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
within specified time.

100969100 MU Execution Error: Command response wrong or no 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
response
101280100 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
frame type.
101280101 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Not this 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
unit's instruction.

101280102 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command identity.

6-7
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101280103 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Instruction 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
length wrong.

101280104 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Parameter 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
significant bits wrong

101280105 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Other 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter wrong.
101280200 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit self-test wrong 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

101280300 Sample probe Unit Error: Mechanical device reset 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
wrong.
101280400 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Self-test.

101280401 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 4 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Malfunction.

101280402 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Wait for handshake.
101280403 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Shutdown.

101280404 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Processing command.

101280405 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Free.

101280406 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Mechanical reset.
101280500 Sample probe Unit Error: Control unit busy. Can't 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
respond to current instruction.

6-8
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101280600 Sample probe Unit Error: Attempted to configure 2 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
un-defined speed.

101280700 Sample probe Unit Error: Speed configuration 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.

101280800 Sample probe Unit Error: Attempted to configure 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined parameter.
101280900 Sample probe Unit Error: Parameter value beyond limit 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
or unreasonable.
101281000 Sample probe Unit Error: Attempted undefined inquiry. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

101281100 Sample probe Unit Error: Inquiry parameter beyond 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
limit or unreasonable.

101281200 Sample probe Unit Error: Attempted undefined system 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction.

101281300 Sample probe Unit Error: System instruction parameter 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
beyond limit or unreasonable.
101281400 Sample probe Unit Error: Attempted to commission 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined position.

101281500 Sample probe Unit Error: Commissioning parameter 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
beyond limit or unreasonable.

101281600 Sample probe Unit Error: System not commissioned or 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
confirmation not consistent with instruction.

6-9
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101281701 Sample probe Unit Error: Tubing control failed. Rinse 9 Turn off the analyzing unit and then
surface not detected during power-on.
(1) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(2) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe
tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your
local distributor.
(3) Check the deionized water tank as instructed by 5.2.8 Checking
Remaining Deionized Water.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101281800 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample disk rotation failed. 4 Ensure the sample disk rotates well as instructed by 4.4.6.6 Sam. Disk
Can't reach initial point. tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101281801 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample disk rotation failed. 4 Ensure the sample disk rotates well as instructed by 4.4.6.6 Sam. Disk
Can't leave initial point. tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101281802 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample disk rotation failed. 4 Ensure the sample disk rotates well as instructed by 4.4.6.6 Sam. Disk
Can't detect weight disk signal. tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101281803 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample disk rotation failed. 4 Turn off the analyzing unit and check if the sample tubes are placed too
Sample probe left in Sample disk. high on the sample disk.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-10
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101281804 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample disk rotation failed. 4 Other errors have higher priority.
Needle not at top point during rotation.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101281902 Sample probe Unit Error: Syringe A/D error. Can't 4 Check the sample syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Sys. tab.
reach initial point.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101281903 Sample probe Unit Error: Syringe A/D error. Can't leave 4 Check the sample syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Sys. tab.
initial point.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101282000 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe rotation error. 4 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit and clean the sample disk rotor.
Can't reach initial point.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the sample probe as instructed
by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101282001 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe rotation error. 4 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit and clean the sample disk rotor.
Not at v-position for rotation.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the sample probe as instructed
by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101282002 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move wrong. 4 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the sample disk rotor.
Can't reach initial (Sample disk/wash) point.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the sample probe as instructed
by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-11
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101282100 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-moved 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by.
wrong. Can't leave initial (Sample disk/wash) point.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101282101 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-moved 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
wrong. Can't leave initial (Sample disk/wash) point.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101282102 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move wrong. 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Not at initial point (Sample disk/wash) for d-move start.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101282107 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move wrong. 31 Turn off the analyzing unit and clear the obstacles from the path of the
Collision. vertical movement of the sample probe.

101282108 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move wrong. 9 Turn off the analyzing unit and pinch the sample probe and push it upward
Collide with transducer holder. to check whether the spring can move freely.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101282110 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move wrong. 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Current position prohibits v-move (Sample disk/wash).
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101282200 Sample probe Unit Error: Attempted undefined simple 0 Other errors have higher priority.
operation.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101282300 Sample probe Unit Error: Wrong cuvette position 2 Other errors have higher priority.
parameter in command.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-12
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101282400 Sample probe Unit Error: Illegal surface detection. 31 Turn off the analyzing unit.
(1) Check whether the sample tubes are placed too high on the sample
disk.
(2) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe
tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your
local distributor.
(4) Check whether the sample probe is bent or scratched. Replace the
damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe if
necessary.
(5) Clean the sample probe as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample
Probe.
If this error occurs frequently, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

101282600 Sample probe Unit Error: Syringe not initialized. 4 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

101289000 Sample probe Unit Error: No execution result received 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
within specified time.
101289100 Sample probe Unit Error: Command response wrong or 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
no response.

101440100 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
frame type.

101440101 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Not this 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
unit's instruction.

101440102 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction identity.

6-13
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101440103 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Instruction 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
length wrong.

101440104 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong command. 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Parameter significant bits wrong.

101440105 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong command. Other 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter wrong.
101440200 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit self-test wrong. 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

101440300 Reagent probe Unit Error: Mechanical device reset 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
wrong
101440400 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Self-test.

101440401 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 5 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Malfunction.

101440402 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Wait for handshake.
101440403 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Shutdown.

101440404 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Processing instruction.

101440405 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Busy.

101440406 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this command. Mechanical reset.
101440500 Reagent probe Unit Error: Control unit busy. Can't 3 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
respond to current instruction.

6-14
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101440600 Reagent probe Unit Error: Attempted to configure 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined speed.

101440700 Reagent probe Unit Error: Speed configuration 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.

101440800 Reagent probe Unit Error: Attempted to configure 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined parameter.
101440900 Reagent probe Unit Error: Parameter configuration 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
beyond limit or unreasonable.
101441000 Reagent probe Unit Error: Attempted undefined inquiry. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441100 Reagent probe Unit Error: Inquiry parameter beyond 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
limit or unreasonable.
101441200 Reagent probe Unit Error: Attempted undefined system 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction.

101441300 Reagent probe Unit Error: System instruction 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.

101441400 Reagent probe Unit Error: Attempted to commission 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined position.
101441500 Reagent probe Unit Error: Commissioning parameter 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
beyond limit or unreasonable.

101441600 Reagent probe Unit Error: Not commissioned or 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
confirmation not consistent with instruction.

6-15
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101441701 Reagent probe Unit Error: Tubing control failed. 9 Turn off the analyzing unit and
Washing solution surface not detected.
(1) Check whether the deionized water tank is empty and add more
deionized water to the tank as necessary.
(2) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe
tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your
local distributor.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101441800 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent disk rotation failed. 5 Check the reagent disk as instructed by 4.4.6.5 Reag. Disk tab.
Can't reach initial position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101441801 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent disk rotation failed. 5 Check the reagent disk as instructed by 4.4.6.5 Reag. Disk tab.
Can't leave initial position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101441802 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent disk rotation failed. 5 Check the reagent disk as instructed by 4.4.6.5 Reag. Disk tab.
Can't detect weight disk signal.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101441803 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent disk rotation failed. 5 Turn off the analyzing unit and check the types of the reagent bottles.
Reagent probe left in Reagent disk.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-16
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101441804 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent disk rotation failed. 5 Other errors have higher priority.
Needle not at highest position for disk rotation.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101441900 Reagent probe unit error: The aspiration/dispensing 31 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab. Check
volume is wrong. The reagent volume exceeds the the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Sys. tab.
upper limit.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101441902 Reagent probe Unit Error: Syringe A/D error. Can't 5 Check the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Sys. tab.
reach initial position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101441903 Reagent probe Unit Error: Syringe A/D error. Can't 5 Check the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Sys. tab.
leave initial position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101442000 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe rotation 5 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the sample disk rotor.
error. Can't reach initial position.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the reagent probe as instructed
by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101442001 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe rotation 5 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the sample disk rotor.
error. Can't leave initial position.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the reagent probe as instructed
by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-17
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101442002 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe rotation 5 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the reagent disk rotor and.
error. Not at v-position for h-rotation.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the reagent probe as instructed
by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101442100 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Can't reach initial (Reagent disk/wash) position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101442101 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Can't leave initial (Reagent disk/wash) position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101442102 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Not at v-initial (Reagent disk/wash) position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101442107 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 31 Turn off the analyzing unit and clear the obstacles in the path of the
Collision. vertical movement of the reagent probe.
101442108 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 9 Turn off the analyzing unit and pinch the reagent probe and push it
Collision transducer hold. upward to see whether it can move freely.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101442110 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Current position prohibits v-move (Reagent disk/wash).
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-18
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101442200 Reagent probe Unit Error: Attempted undefined simple 0 Other errors have higher priority.
operation.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101442300 Reagent probe Unit Error: Wrong cuvette position 0 Other errors have higher priority.
parameter in command.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101442400 Reagent probe Unit Error: Illegal surface detection. 31 Turn off the analyzing unit and
(1) Check the types of the reagent bottles.
(2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe
tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your
local distributor.
(4) Check whether the sample probe is bent or scratched. Replace the
damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe if
necessary.
(5) Clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent
Probe.
If this error occurs frequently, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.
101442600 Reagent probe Unit Error: Syringe not initialized 5 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
(unknown syringe current position)

101449000 Reagent probe Unit Error: Execution result not 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
received within specified time.

6-19
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101449100 Reagent probe Unit Error: Command response wrong 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
or no response.

101600100 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
frame type

101600101 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Wrong command. Not this 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
unit's instruction
101600102 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command identity.
101600103 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Wrong command. 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Instruction length wrong

101600104 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Wrong command. 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Parameter significant bits wrong
101600105 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Wrong command. Other 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter wrong

101600200 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit self-test wrong 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

101600300 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mechanical device reset 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
wrong
101600400 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Self-test.

101600401 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Malfunction
101600402 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Wait for handshake.

101600403 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Shutdown.

6-20
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101600404 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Processing instruction.

101600405 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Free.

101600406 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit not supporting 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
this instruction. Mechanical reset.
101600500 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Control unit busy. Can't 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
respond to current instruction.
101600600 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Attempted to configure 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined speed.

101600700 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Speed configuration 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.
101600800 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Attempted to configure 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined parameter.

101600900 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Parameter value beyond 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
limit or unreasonable.

101601000 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Attempted undefined inquiry. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601100 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Inquiry parameter beyond 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
limit or unreasonable.

101601200 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Attempted undefined system 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction.
101601300 Loading/mixing Unit Error: System instruction 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.

101601400 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Attempted to commission 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined position.

6-21
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101601500 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Commissioning parameter 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
beyond limit or unreasonable.

101601600 Loading/mixing Unit Error: System not commissioned 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
or confirmation not consistent with instruction.

101601700 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. 7 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor.
Can't reach initial (wash) position.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101601701 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. 7 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor.
Can't leave initial (wash) position.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab .
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101601702 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. Not 7 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor.
at v-initial position (wash) for d-move.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101601707 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. 7 Other errors have higher priorities.
Current position prohibits v-move (wash).
Check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-22
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101601800 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar h-move error. 7 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor.
Can't reach initial position.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101601802 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar h-move error. Not 7 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor.
at h-initial position for h-rotation.
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.3 Mix. Bar tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101602000 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm v-move error. 9 Turn on the analyzing unit. Check the manipulator as instructed by
Can't reach initial (other) position 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101602001 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm v-move error. 9 Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed by
Can't leave initial (other) position. 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101602100 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm h-move error. 6 Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed by
Can't reach initial position. 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-23
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101602101 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm h-move error. 6 Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed by
Can't leave initial position. 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101602200 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Upper hand can't close when taking cuvette.
101602201 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Upper hand can't open when placing cuvette.

101602202 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Lower hand can't close when taking cuvette.

101602203 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Lower hand can't open when placing cuvette.

101602204 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Upper hand accidentally open during movement.

101602205 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Upper hand accidentally closed during movement.
101602206 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Lower hand accidentally opened during movement.

101602207 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. 6 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Lower hand accidentally closed during movement.

101602208 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm hold error. No 0 Check the remaining cuvettes and add more cuvettes as needed.
cuvette in compartment.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-24
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101602209 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Cuvette compartment not 0 If there is no cuvette left in the cuvette compartment, add more cuvettes to
ready. the compartment as instructed by 1.1.1.6 Reaction Cuvette Loader and

press the button.


If there is cuvette in the compartment, ignore the message.
If this error occurs frequently, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

101602210 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Cuvette compartment trolley 0 If there is no cuvette left in the cuvette compartment, add more cuvettes to
moving. the compartment as instructed by 1.1.1.6 Reaction Cuvette Loader and

press the button.


If there is cuvette in the compartment, ignore the message.
If this error occurs frequently, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

101609000 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Execution result not 5 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
received within specified time.

101609100 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Command response wrong 5 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
or no response.

101760100 Temperature Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal frame 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
type
101760101 Temperature Unit Error: Wrong command. Not this 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Unit's instruction

101760102 Temperature Unit Error: Wrong command. Illegal 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command identity.

6-25
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101760103 Temperature Unit Error: Wrong command. Instruction 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
length wrong

101760104 Temperature Unit Error: Wrong command. Parameter 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
significant bits wrong

101760105 Temperature Unit Error: Wrong command. Other 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter wrong
101760200 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit self-test wrong 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

101760400 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Self-test.
101760401 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Malfunction

101760402 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Wait for handshake.

101760403 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Shutdown.
101760404 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Processing instruction.

101760405 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Free.

101760406 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit not supporting this 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction. Mechanical reset.

101760500 Temperature Unit Error: Control unit busy. Can't 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
respond to current instruction.
101760600 Temperature Unit Error: Attempted undefined inquiry. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

6-26
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101760700 Temperature Unit Error: Attempted undefined 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
temperature parameter inquiry.

101761100 Temperature Unit Error: Attempted undefined 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
temperature inquiry.

101761200 Temperature Unit Error: Attempted target temperature 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
beyond limit or unreasonable.
101761300 Temperature Unit Error: Attempted undefined system 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction.
101769000 Temperature Unit Error: Execution result not received 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
within specified time.

101769100 Temperature Unit Error: Command response wrong or 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
no response.
101920100 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Wrong 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command. Illegal frame type.

101920101 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Wrong 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command. Not this unit's instruction.

101920102 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Wrong 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command. Illegal command identity.

101920103 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Wrong 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command. Instruction length wrong.
101920104 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Wrong 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command. Parameter significant bits wrong.
101920105 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Wrong 31 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command. Other parameter wrong.

6-27
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101920200 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Control unit 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
self-test wrong.

101920300 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Mechanical 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
device reset wrong.

101920400 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Control unit 8 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
not supporting this instruction. Self-test.
101920401 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Control unit 9 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
not supporting this instruction. Malfunction.
101920402 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Control unit 8 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
not supporting this instruction. Wait for handshake.

101920403 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Control unit 8 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
not supporting this instruction. Shutdown.
101920500 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Control unit 8 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
busy. Can't respond to current instruction.

101920600 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Attempted 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined speed.

101920700 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Speed 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
configuration beyond limit or unreasonable.

101920800 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Attempted to 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
configure undefined parameter.
101920900 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Parameter 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
configuration beyond limit or unreasonable.
101921000 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Attempted 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined inquiry.

6-28
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


101921100 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Inquiry 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.

101921200 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Attempted 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
undefined system instruction.

101921300 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: System 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
instruction parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.
101921400 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Re-disk 8 Check the reaction disk as instructed by 4.4.6.4 Reac. Disk tab.
rotation error. Can't reach initial position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101921401 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Re-disk 8 Check the reaction disk as instructed by 4.4.6.4 Reac. Disk tab.
rotation error. Can't leave initial position.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
101921402 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Re-disk 8 Check the reaction disk as instructed by 4.4.6.4 Reac. Disk tab.
rotation error. Can't detect weight disk signal.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101921500 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Photoelectrical 9 Other errors have higher priorities.
data overflow.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

101929000 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Execution 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
result not received within specified time.
101929100 Reaction disk and Photoelectrical Error: Command 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
response wrong or no response

6-29
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


111282100 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 9 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Can't reach initial position. (Re-disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
111282101 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 9 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Can't leave initial position. (Re-disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
111282102 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 9 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Re-disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
111282106 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 2 Turn off the analyzing unit and
Illegal surface detection. (Re-disk)
(1) Check whether the sample tubes are placed too high on the sample
disk.
(2) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe
tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your
local distributor.
(4) Check whether the sample probe is bent or scratched. Replace the
damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe if
necessary.
(5) Clean the sample probe as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample
Probe.
If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

6-30
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


111282110 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 9 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Current position prohibits v-move. (Re-disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
111282400 Sample probe Unit Error: V-position not initialized. 9 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
(Re-disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
111442100 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 9 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Can't reach initial position. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
111442101 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 9 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Can't leave initial position. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

111442102 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 9 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-31
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


111442106 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 0 Turn off the analyzing unit and
Illegal surface detection. (Reagent disk)
(1) Check the types of the reagent bottles.
(2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the reagent probe to see if there are drops hanging on the
probe tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
(4) Check whether the reagent probe is bent or scratched. Replace the
damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe if
necessary.
(5) Clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent
Probe.
If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

111442110 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 9 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Current position prohibits v-move. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-32
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


111442400 Reagent probe Unit Error: Illegal surface detection. 9 Turn off the analyzing unit and
(Reagent disk)
(1) Check the types of the reagent bottles.
(2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the reagent probe to see if there are drops hanging on the
probe tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
(4) Check whether the reagent probe is bent or scratched. Replace the
damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe if
necessary.
(5) Clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent
Probe.
If this error occurs frequently, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

111601700 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. 9 (1). Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor
Can't reach initial position. (Re-disk)
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit. Check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

111601701 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. 9 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor
Can't leave initial position. (Re-disk)
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit. Check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-33
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


111601702 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. Not 9 (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor
at v-initial position for d-move. (Re-disk)
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit. Check the mixing bar as instructed by
4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

111601707 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Mixing bar v-move error. 9 Other errors have higher priorities. Check the movement of the mixing bar
Current position prohibits v-move. (Re-disk) at the maintenance screen.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

111602000 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm v-move error. 9 Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed by
Can't reach initial position. (Re-disk) 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

111602001 Loading/mixing Unit Error: Robotic arm v-move error. 9 Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed by
Can't leave initial position. (Re-disk) 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

121442100 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Can't reach initial position. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

121442101 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Can't leave initial position. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-34
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


121442102 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

121442110 Reagent probe Unit Error: Reagent probe v-move error. 5 Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 Reag. Probe tab.
Current position prohibits v-move. (Reagent disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
131282100 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Can't reach initial position. (Sample disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
131282101 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Can't leave initial position. (Sample disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

131282102 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error. 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Sample disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

131282110 Sample probe Unit Error: Sample probe v-move error 4 Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 Sam. Probe tab.
Current position prohibits v-move. (Sample disk)
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

200000001 Temperature Unit Warn: Re-disk actual temperature 0 Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient temperature
exceeds top limit. falls into the specified range.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-35
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


200000002 Temperature Unit Warn: Reagent actual pre-heat 0 Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient temperature
temperature exceeds top limit. falls into the specified range.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

200000003 Temperature Unit Warn: Re-disk did not reach 0 Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range.
expected temperature within specified time.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

200000004 Temperature Unit Warn: Reagent preheat didn't reach 0 Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range.
set temperature within specified time.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

200000005 Temperature Unit Warn: Re-disk temperature fluctuates 0 Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range.
over given range under normal operation
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

200000006 Temperature Unit Warn: Reagent preheat temperature 0 Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range.
fluctuate over given range under normal operation.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

200000007 Temperature Unit Warn: Re-disk temperature control 0 Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient temperature
shutdown for overheating. falls into the specified range.
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

200000008 Temperature Unit Warn: Preheat temperature 0 Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient temperature
shutdown for overheating. falls into the specified range.
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201280005 Sample probe Unit Warn: Sample probe syringe full. 0 If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-36
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


201280006 Sample probe Unit Warn: Sample probe syringe empty. 0 If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201280007 Sample probe Unit Warn: Sample probe didn't detect 20 Check the sample volumes in the sample tubes.
fluid surface in Sample disk.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
201280009 Sample probe Unit Warn: Sample probe didn't detect 2 Reagent unit errors have higher priority.
fluid surface in Re-disk.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
201280010 Sample probe Unit Warn: Insufficient dispensing of 0 Check the dispensing ability of the sample syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7
Sample probe. Fluid Sys. tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201440005 Reagent probe Unit Warn: Reagent probe syringe full. 0 If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201440006 Reagent probe Unit Warn: Reagent probe syringe 0 If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
empty. your local distributor.

201440007 Reagent probe Unit Warn: Reagent probe didn't detect 30 Check the reagent volumes in the reagent bottles.
fluid surface in Reagent disk.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-37
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


201440009 Reagent probe Unit Warn: Reagent probe didn't detect 3 Turn off the analyzing unit and
fluid surface in Re-disk.
(1) Check the remaining reagents in the reagent bottles.
(2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking
Sample/Reagent Syringes.
(3) Check the reagent probe to see if there are drops hanging on the
probe tip. If there are, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
(3) Check the deionized water tank as instructed by 5.2.8 Checking
Remaining Deionized Water.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201440010 Reagent probe Unit Warn: Insufficient dispensing of 0 Check the dispensing ability of the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7
Reagent probe. Fluid Sys. tab.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201600009 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Robotic arm can't release 6 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
held Re-cuvette. Unloading failed.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201600010 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Robotic arm can't grab used 6 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
Re-cuvette from Re-disk.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201600011 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Re-cuvette dropped from 0 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
robotic arm.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-38
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


201600012 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Robotic arm didn't place 0 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
used Re-cuvette.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
201600013 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Robotic arm didn't grab new 6 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
Re-cuvette from compartment.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
201600014 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Re-cuvette dropped from 0 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
robotic arm.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
201600015 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Robotic arm didn't place 6 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
new Re-cuvette.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201600016 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Collision occurred when 6 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
unloading used cuvette. Operation cancelled.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
201600017 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Collision occurred when 6 Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Manipulator tab.
loading new cuvette. Operation cancelled.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

201600018 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Used cuvette compartment 0 Turn off the analyzing unit and empty the used-cuvette bucket as
full. Storing segments may cause problem. instructed by 5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-39
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


201600019 Loading/mixing Unit Warn: Compartment empty. Can't 0 Check the remaining cuvettes in the cuvette compartment and add more
load new segment. cuvettes as needed.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000001 Operation unit: System initialization error. Can't 10 (1) Turn off the POWER and check the connection between the analyzing
connect main unit. unit and the operation unit.
(2) Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000002 Operation unit: System initialization error. Main unit 10 Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart
self-test abnormal. it.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000010 Operation unit: System initialization error. Serial port 10 Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart
initialization error. it.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000012 Operation unit: System initialization error. Can't 0 (1) Ensure the printer is well connected to the printer.
connect printer.
(2) Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then
restart it.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-40
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


400000016 Operation unit: System initialization error. Main unit 10 (1) Turn off the POWER and check the connection between the analyzing
connection abnormal. unit and the operation unit.
(2) Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then
restart it.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000100 Operation unit: Power-on pretreatment error. Lamp of 1 Other errors have higher priority.
insufficient illumination. Replacement needed.
If the error remains, change the lamp or contact Mindray Customer
Service Department or your local distributor.

400000204 Operation unit: Updating database failed. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000209 Operation unit: Can't open help file. 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

400000216 Operation unit: Wrong check sum for received data 0 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000220 Operation unit: Serial port error. Instruction can't be 10 Check the connection between the analyzing unit and the operation unit,
transmitted properly. or change the serial port. Then run the control system again.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000221 Operation unit: Serial port error. Can't receive test data. 10 Check the connection between the analyzing unit and the operation unit,
or change the serial port. Then run the control system again.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000225 Operation unit: Insufficient remaining reagent. 0 Check the remaining reagents for the test and add reagents to the bottles
as needed.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-41
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


400000251 Operation unit: Calibration sensitivity error. 0 Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate.
If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

400000252 Operation unit: Calibration factor difference exceeds 0 Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate.
limit.
If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.
400000253 Operation unit: Multi-point linear or non- linear 0 Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate.
correlated calibration factor (R2) exceeds limit.
If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.
400000254 Operation unit: Standard difference of calibration curve 0 Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate.
exceeds limit.
If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.
400000255 Operation unit: Can't calculate calibration parameter by 0 Check the calculation method.
given method
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000276 Operation unit: Received data overflow. 10 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.

400000281 Operation unit: Calibration zero concentration 1 Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate.
absorbency exceeds limit.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000282 Operation unit: Incomplete calibration repeat data. 1 Re-calibrate.


Can't calculate.
400000283 Operation unit: No calibrator. Can't calculate. 1 Re-edit the calibrator settings and re-calibrate.

6-42
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


400000284 Operation unit: Reagent out. 30 Check the remaining reagents of the test and add reagents as needed.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
400000286 Operation unit: Test cycle overtime. Can't continue. 9 Other errors have higher priority.
Exit the control system and then restart it.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000287 Operation unit: Excessive dark current. Test prohibited. 10 Other errors have higher priority.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000288 Operation unit: Reaction calculation error. 0 Re-run the sample.


If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or your local distributor.

400000289 Operation unit: Response exceeds calibration range. 0 Dilute the sample and re-run it.
Can't calculate result concentration.
400000290 Operation unit: Main unit can't recover from wrong 8 Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
status.
400000291 Operation unit: Startup pretreatment error. Wrong blank 10 Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart
test result. it.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-43
Troubleshooting

Error code Error Message Level Corrective Measure


400000292 Operation unit: Downloading parameter failed. 10 Other errors have higher priority.
Exit the control system and then restart it.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000293 Operation unit: Pretreatment not finished properly. 10 This error is triggered by other errors. Check the causes of the root errors
and take the recommended corrective measures. Use the emergency exit
function to exit the control system and then restart it.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

400000294 Operation unit: Shutdown. Not finished properly. 10 This error is triggered by other errors. Check the causes of the root errors
and take the recommended corrective measures. Use the emergency exit
function to exit the control system and then restart it.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

500000001 LIS: Unconnected 0 Check if the LIS server is power on and can work properly.
Check if the line between the system and the LIS can work properly.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

500000002 LIS: Sending HL7 message failed 0 Check if the LIS server is power on and can work properly.
Check if the line between the system and the LIS can work properly.
If this error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.

6-44
7 Calculation Methods

7.1 Reaction Types


The BS-300 can perform calculations for three reaction types:

Endpoint
Fixed-time
Kinetic

7.1.1 Endpoint
The endpoint reaction is the most ideal. The reaction reaches equilibrium after
certain period. Because the equilibrium constant is very large, it can be considered
that all substrates have changed into products, and the absorbance of the reacting
liquid does not change any more. The absorbance change is proportional to the
amount of the product present.

Figure 7-1 Endpoint reaction

t1 t2 t3 t

As shown in Figure 7-1, t1 is the time when the reagent is added, and t 2 is the

time when the sample is added. The reaction starts when they are mixed. At t 3 the

reaction reaches the equilibrium and the absorbance reading is taken. The reaction
time is t 3 − t 2 .

The Endpoint reaction is not subject to such condition changes as enzyme


concentration, pH value and temperature, as long as the changes are not significant
enough to affect the reaction time.

7.1.2 Fixed-Time
For the fixed-time reaction, the reaction velocity (v), within a specific period, is
proportional to the substrate concentration [S], namely, v=k[S]. As the substrate is
consumed continuously, the reaction velocity becomes smaller and smaller, and so

7-1
Calculation Methods

does the change rate of the absorbance. It takes much time for such a reaction to
reach the equilibrium. Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any
time. The reaction can, however, become steady only after a delay because it is
complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to the
complex serum compositions. For any first order reaction, the substrate
concentration [S] at a specific time (t) during the reaction is:

[S ] = [S 0 ]× e − kt
Where,

[S0] - original substrate concentration

e - base of the natural logarithm

k - velocity constant

Within the interval between t1 and t 2 , the relationship between ∆[S] (delta
substrate concentration) and [S0] is:

− ∆[ S ]
[ S 0] = − kt1 − kt 2
e −e

That is, within a fixed time interval, the delta substrate concentration is proportional
to the original substrate concentration, which is the generality of the first order
reactions. Within this interval, absorbance change is proportional to the substrate
concentration. See Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Fixed-time reaction

t1 t2 t3 t4 t

As shown in Figure 7-2, t1 is the time when the reagent is added and t 2 is the
time when the sample is added. From t 3 the reaction becomes steady and t 4 is
the time to stop monitoring the reaction. The absorbance readings are respectively
taken at t 3 and t 4 .

Methodologically, the fixed-time method requires more than the endpoint method
does. All factors that have effects on the reaction velocity, such as pH, temperature
and enzyme concentration, must keep constant in the two-point analysis. In addition,
the timing must be precise and the calibration is necessary.

7-2
Calculation Methods

7.1.3 Kinetic
For the kinetic reaction, the reaction velocity is not related to the substrate
concentration and remains constant in the reaction process. As a result, for a given
wavelength, the absorbance of the reacting liquid changes evenly, and the change
rate (∆A/min) is proportional to the activity or concentration of the subject, which is
usually the enzyme.

In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be large enough, and the
reaction will no longer a zeroth order reaction when the substrate is consumed to a
certain degree. Therefore, the theory only stands within certain period. In addition,
the reaction can become steady only after a certain period because the reaction is
complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to the
complex serum compositions. All reagent manufacturers have strict specifications for
these two periods. See Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Kinetic reaction

t1 t2 t3 tn
t

As shown in Figure 7-3, t1 is the time when the reagent is added. t 2 is the time
when the sample is added. From t 3 the reaction becomes steady. t n is the time to
stop testing the reaction. t 3 − t 2 is the time delay, and t n − t 3 is the monitoring
time.

7.2 Calculation Process


The figure below shows the measurement and calculation flow of the analyzer.

AD Value

Absorbance

Response

Calibration Parameter

Test Result QC Result

QC Conclusion

7-3
Calculation Methods

7.2.1 AD Value → Absorbance

Figure 7-4 How the liquid absorbs light

I0 It

As shown in Figure 7-4, when a parallel monochromatic light beam whose intensity
is I 0 goes through a flow cell (whose length is L ) containing a solution (whose
concentration is C ), some photons are absorbed, and the intensity is attenuated
from I 0 to I t , so the absorbance A of this solution is:

It
A = − Lg
I0

Where,

It
- transmissivity
I0

The BS-300 measures the light intensity through the photo-electric conversion, linear
amplification and A/D conversion. For the light intensity signal I i of Channel i, the
AD output Di is:

Di = K pe ⋅ K a ⋅ K ad ⋅ I i

Where,

K pe - photo electric conversion factor

Ka - linear amplification factor

K ad - A/D conversion factor

Di - data of Channel i

Ii - light intensity of Channel i

So,

Ii0 D
Ai = lg = lg i 0
Ii Di

7-4
Calculation Methods

Where,

Ai - absorbance of Channel i

Di 0 - background AD output

Di - AD output after the substrate is added.

In theory, when the lights are off, the AD output of each channel will be zero. In
practice, because of the existence of dark currents, there is still a background
output Dibackground , which should be deducted. Then, the complete absorbance
formula should be:

Di 0 − Dibackground
Ai = lg
Di − Dibackground

7.2.2 Absorbance → Response

For the analyzer, the response (R) is defined as the absorbance change before and
after the reaction, or the absorbance change rate during the reaction process.

The formula for calculating the response (R) is closely related to the reaction type
(kinetic, fixed-time, endpoint), the number of reagents (single, double), and the
number of wavelengths (single or double). They are respectively detailed in the
following sections.

7.2.2.1 Calculating the response of the endpoint reaction

Single-reagent and single-wavelength

Figure 7-5 Endpoint reaction with single-reagent and single-wavelength

t1 t2 t3 t

As shown in Figure 7-5, t1 is the time when the reagent (volume: V) is added. t2
is the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. The reaction starts when they are
mixed. At t 3 the reaction reaches the equilibrium and the absorbance reading is
taken. t 3 − t 2 is the reaction time. So,

R = Rs − RSMPB

7-5
Calculation Methods

Both of Rs and RSMPB are calculated with the formula R=At3 − K1 × At2 −1 .

Where,

Rs - response of reaction mixture

RSMPB - response of sample blank. If the sample blank has not been requested,
RSMPB =0.

At 3 - absorbance at t3

At2 −1 - absorbance at the previous point before t2

K1 - single-reagent test volume coefficient. If the start time of reaction is 0,


V
K1 = ; otherwise, K1 =1.
V +S

Single-reagent and double-wavelength


The calculation method is similar to that for the single-reagent and single-wavelength
reaction, except for every measurement period, the absorbance is Aλ1 − Aλ 2 ,
where, Aλ1 is the absorbance at the primary wavelength, and Aλ 2 is the
absorbance obtained under the secondary wavelength.

Double-reagent and single-wavelength

Figure 7-6 Endpoint reaction with double-reagent and single-wavelength

t1 t2 t3 t4 t

As shown in Figure 7-6, t1 is the time when reagent 1 (volume: V1) is added. t 2 is
the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. Then, reagent 1 and the sample are
mixed. t 3 is the time when the reagent 2 (volume: V2) is added. Then, reagent 2 is
mixed into the reaction liquid. At t4 the reaction reaches equilibrium. t3 − t2 is the
incubation period, and t 4 − t 3 is the reaction time. So,

R = Rs − RRB

7-6
Calculation Methods

Both of Rs and RRB are calculated with the formula R = At4 − K 2 × An .

Where,

Rs - response of reaction mixture

RRB - response of double-reagent blank

At4 - absorbance at t 4

An - absorbance at the start time of reaction

K 2 - double-reagent volume coefficient. If the start time of reaction is 0, K 2 = 0; if


V1 + S
the start time of reaction is more than 0, K 2 = 1; otherwise, K 2 = .
V1 + S + V2

Double-reagent and double-wavelength


The calculation method is similar to that for double-reagent and single-wavelength
reaction, except for every measurement period, the absorbance is Aλ1 − Aλ 2 ,
where, Aλ1 is the absorbance obtained at the primary wavelength, and Aλ 2 is the
absorbance obtained at the secondary wavelength.

7.2.2.2 Calculating the response of the fixed-time reaction

Single-wavelength (for both single-reagent and double-reagent)

Figure 7-7 Fixed-time reaction with single-wavelength (single reagent)

t1 t2 t3 t4 t

As shown in Figure 7-7, t1 is the time when the reagent (volume: V) is added and
t 2 is the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. t 3 is the time from which the
reaction becomes steady. t4 is the time the test on the reaction is stopped.
Absorbance is taken respectively at t 3 , t4 and the response R is:

At4 − At3
R=
t4 − t3

7-7
Calculation Methods

Double-wavelength
The response is:

( Atλ41 − Atλ42 ) − ( Atλ31 − Atλ3 2 )


R=
t4 − t3

Where,

Atλ41 - primary wavelength absorbance at t4

Atλ42 - secondary wavelength absorbance at t4

Atλ31 - primary wavelength absorbance at t3

Atλ3 2 - secondary wavelength absorbance at t3

7.2.2.3 Calculating the response of the kinetic reaction

Single-wavelength (for both single-reagent and double-reagent)

Figure 7-8 Kinetic reaction with single-wavelength (single reagent)

t1 t2 t3 tn
t

As shown in the figure, t1 is the time when the reagent (volume: V) is added. t 2 is
the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. t 3 is the time from which the
reaction becomes steady. tn is the time when the test on the reaction is stopped.
t 3 − t 2 is the time delay, and t n − t 3 is the reaction time. The response ( R ) is
equal to the slope of the linear section between t 3 and tn .

Double-wavelength
The calculation method is similar to that for the single-wavelength reaction. The only
difference is that the absorbance at a certain point is equal to the primary
wavelength absorbance minus the secondary wavelength absorbance.

7-8
Calculation Methods

7.2.3 Response → Calibration Parameter

The BS-300 provides two calibration methods: linear calibration and nonlinear
calibration.

The linear calibration includes the single-point linear calibration (also called factor
method), two-point linear calibration (also called linear method), and multi-point (over
3 points) linear calibration (also called linear regression method). They are mainly
used for tests determined by colorimetry.

The nonlinear calibration includes Logistic-Log 4P, Logistic-Log 5P, Exponential5P,


Polynomial5P, Parabola and Spline. They are mainly used for tests determined by
turbidimetry.

7.2.3.1 Calculations of linear calibration parameters

Single-point linear calibration


Calibration formula: R = KC

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (or activity)

K - calibration parameter

R
This calibration method adopts only one calibration parameter K , and K= .
C

This calibration method requires only one calibrator. For most enzyme tests, you can
input the factor directly (input value F=1/ K ) without any calibration.

Two-point linear calibration


Calibration formula: R = KC + b

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (or activity)

K , b - calibration parameters

This calibration method adopts two calibration parameters: K and b.

R2 − R1
K=
C 2 − C1

7-9
Calculation Methods

R2 − R1
b = R1 − ( ) × C1
C 2 − C1

This calibration method requires two calibrators. C 1 and C 2 are respectively the
concentrations of calibrator 1 and calibrator 2. R 1 and R 2 are respectively the
responses of calibrator 1 and calibrator 2.

Multi-point linear calibration


Calibration formula: R = KC + b

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (or activity)

K , b - calibration parameters

This calibration method adopts two calibration parameters: K and b.


n n n

∑ CiRi − (∑ Ci)(∑ Ri) / n


K= i =1
n
i =1
n
i =1

∑ Ci
i =1
2
− (∑ Ci ) 2 / n
i =1
n n n
n ∑ CiRi − (∑ Ci)(∑ Ri) / n n
b = ( ∑ Ri ) / n − [ i =1 i =1 i =1
]( ∑ Ci ) / n
n n
i =1
∑ Ci 2 − (∑ Ci) 2 / n i =1
i =1 i =1

This calibration method requires n (n≥3) calibrators. C i is the concentration of


calibrator i. R i is the response of calibrator i.

7.2.3.2 Calculations of nonlinear calibration parameters

Logistic-Log 4P
1
Calibration formula: R = R0 + K
1 + exp[−(a + b ln C )]

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (activity)

K , R 0, a , b - calibration parameter

7-10
Calculation Methods

This calibration method adopts four parameters: K , R 0, a and b.

This calibration method requires at least four calibrators. The concentration (or
activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0.

This calibration method is applied to the calibration curve that the response becomes
smaller and smaller with the concentration increase. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Logistic–Log 4P calibration curve

C1 C2 C3 C4 C

Logistic-Log 5P
1
Calibration formula: R = R0 + K
1 + exp[ −(a + b ln C + cC )]

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (activity)

K , R 0, a , b , c - calibration parameter

This calibration method adopts five parameters: K , R 0, a , b and c .

This calibration method requires at least five calibrators. The concentration (or
activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0.

The applications of the calibration method are the same with that of Logistic-Log 4P,
but this method has a higher fitting.

Exponential 5P
Calibration formula: R = R0 + K exp[a ln C + b(ln C ) + c(ln C ) ]
2 3

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (activity)

K , R 0, a , b , c - calibration parameter

This calibration method adopts five parameters: K , R 0, a , b and c .

7-11
Calculation Methods

This calibration method requires at least five calibrators. The concentration (or
activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0.

This calibration method is applied to the calibration curve that the response
increases sharply when the concentration reaches a specific value. See Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Exponential 5p calibration curve

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
C

Polynomial 5P
R − R0 R − R0 2 R − R0 3
Calibration formula: ln C = a + b ( ) + c( ) + d( )
100 100 100
Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (activity)

R 0, a , b , c , d - calibration parameter

This calibration method adopts five parameters: R 0, a , b , c and d .

This calibration method requires at least five calibrators. The concentration (or
activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0.

This calibration method is applied to the calibration curve that the response
increases sharply when the concentration reaches a specific value.

Parabola
Calibration formula: R = aC 2 + bC + c

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (activity)

a, b, c - calibration parameter

7-12
Calculation Methods

This calibration method adopts three parameters: a , b and c .

This calibration method requires at least three calibrators.

Spline
Calibration formula: R = R0i + ai C + bi C + ci C
2 3

Where,

R - calibrator response

C - calibrator concentration (activity)

R0i , ai , bi , ci - calibration parameter, i =1, 2,…, n-1, n - number of calibrators

This calibration method adopts 4(n-1) parameters: R0i , ai , bi and ci .

This calibration method requires 2-6 calibrators. Because this method adopts the
segment fitting, its fitting degree is the highest among all calibration types.

7.2.4 Calibration Parameter → Test Result/QC Result

The calculations of test results vary with different calibration types.

7.2.4.1 Result calculations after linear calibrations

Single-point linear calibration


R
C=
K

Where,

K - calibration parameter

Or,

C = R×F

Where,

F - input factor.

Two-point linear calibration

7-13
Calculation Methods

R −b
C=
K

Where,

K, b - calibration parameters

Multi-point linear calibration


R −b
C=
K

Where,

K, b - calibration parameters

7.2.4.2 Result calculations after nonlinear calibrations

Logistic-Log 4P
K
− a − ln( − 1)
R − R0
C = EXP( )
b

Where,

R0, K, a, b - calibration parameters

Logistic-Log 5P
Obtain the positive real root with the dichotomy method.

Exponential 5P
Obtain the positive real root with the dichotomy method.

Polynomial5P
R − R0 R − R0 R − R0
C = exp( a + b ( ) + c( )2 + d ( )3 )
100 100 100

Where,

R0, a, b, c, d - calibration parameters

Parabola

7-14
Calculation Methods

Obtain the positive real root of the following linear quadratic equation:

aC 2 + bC + c − R = 0 .

Spline
Obtain the positive real root with the dichotomy method.

7.2.5 QC Result → QC Conclusion



The BS-300 provides four QC rules: Westgard multi-rule, X -R, Cumulative sum
check and cumulative error.

7.2.5.1 Westgard multi-rule

Westgard multi-rule includes ten sub-rules. The clinical meanings of the ten
sub-rules are as follows:

Symbol Definition QC Conclusion


12S There is 1 point falling out of the range from Warning
the average+2SD to the average-2SD.
13S There is 1 point falling out of the range from Out-of-control (random
the average+3SD to the average-3SD. error, system error)
22S There are 2 adjacent points falling out of Out-of-control (system
the range from the average+2SD to the error)
average-2SD.
R4S There are 2 continuous values whose Out-of-control (random
difference exceeding 4SD. error)
41S There are 4 adjacent points falling out of Out-of-control (system
the range from the average+1SD to the error)
average-1SD.
10X There are 10 adjacent points falling on the Out-of-control (system
same side of the average. error)

7-15
Calculation Methods

QC conclusion flow:

QC Data

No
12S within control

Yes No
No No No No
22 S R4 S 41 S 10 x
13 S

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

out-of-control

7.2.5.2 X -R

This rule obtains the difference (R) between two tested values (X1 and X2) of a same
control, and then compares it with the input SDR. If R is larger than 2SDR or smaller
than -2SDR, the rule considers it out-of-control. The value of SDR should be obtained
in the following procedures: After pre-testing the control, test it continuously for 20
days. Test it twice before and after adding the sample everyday. Obtain the SDR of
the difference (R) between two tested values (X1 and X2).

7.2.5.3 Cumulative sum check

Rule Threshold(k) Control Limit (h)


CS-(1.0SD: 2.7SD) ±1.0SD ±2.7SD
CS-(1.0SD: 3.0SD) ±1.0SD ±3.0SD
CS-(0.5SD: 5.1SD) ±0.5SD ±5.1SD

1 This rule obtains the value of k and the control limit h.


2 When the QC value is no larger than the value of k, no processing is
required.
3 When the QC value overruns the value of k (larger than the upper limit or
smaller than the lower limit), the system starts to calculate the cumulative
sum.
4 For subsequent data, the system continues to calculate the cumulative
sum.
5 When the symbol changes (from positive to negative, or from negative to
positive) with the cumulative sum, the system stops the calculation and
resets the cumulative sum. For subsequent data, the system continues to
calculate the cumulative sum.

7-16
Calculation Methods

6 When the cumulative sum overruns the control limit h (larger than the
upper limit or smaller than the lower limit), the system considers it
out-of-control.

7.2.5.4 Cumulative error

This rule calculates the difference (error, expressed with the symbol plus or minus)
between the tested value and target value of a test of a control.

1st day cumulative error1 = error1

2nd day cumulative error2 = error1 + error2

3rd day cumulative error3 = cumulative error2 + error3

nth day cumulative errorn = cumulative errorn-1 + errorn

When the cumulative error overruns the cumulative error limit E or –E, the system
considers it out-of-control.

7.2.5.5 Twin-plot

+3SD
+2SD

-2SD
-3SD

-3SD -2SD Y +2SD +3SD

The QC chart, which can sensitively indicate system errors and random errors, is present to
help you make a QC conclusion.

7-17
Appendix A Specifications

A.1 Technical Specifications


Throughput: 300tests/h maximum
Tests analyzed simultaneously: 50 (single-reagent)
Test types: Endpoint, Fixed-time and Kinetic. All supporting monochromatics
and bichromatics

Sample volume: 3µl-45µl; precision: 0.5µl


Sample Disk: 60 sample tube positions, including 6 calibrator positions, 3
control positions, 5 for STAT sample positions; 5 virtual disks for maximum 300
samples
Compatible sample containers: micro-tubes, collection tubes and test tubes of
the following sizes: Φ12mm×68.5mm, Φ12mm×99mm, Φ12.7mm×75mm,
Φ12.7mm×100mm
STAT samples: can be inserted immediately for analysis with higher priority
Sample probe: with a built-in level detector; equipped with auto safeguard;
capable of tracking sample level
Washing function: automatically washing interiors and exteriors of sample probe;
carryover no more than 0.1%
Auto re-run

Reagent volume: 30µl -450µl; precision 1µl


Reagent disk: 50 bottle positions; 2 virtual disks
Compatible reagent bottles: Mindray inner-circle bottles, Mindray outer-circle
bottles, Hitachi 7060 bottles and Hitachi 7170 bottles
Reagent probe: with a built-in level detector; equipped with auto safeguard;
capable of tracking reagent level
Washing function: automatically washing interiors and exteriors of reagent
probe; carryover no more than 0.1%
Refrigerator: capable of running 24 hours a day to keep the temperature at
4-10˚С

Mixing bar: for single-reagent tests, it functions immediately (within the same
period) after sample dispensing; for double-reagent tests, it functions
immediately (within the same period) dispensing of the second reagent.

Reaction disk: 80 reaction cuvettes


Reaction temperature: 37±0.3˚С with fluctuation no greater than ±0.1˚С
Compatible cuvettes: 5×6×25; 5mm optical length; disposable; 750µl
Reaction volume: 180-500µl
Auto cuvette load/unloading mechanism

A-1
Specifications

Photometric system: interference filters of various wavelengths; static fiber


optics
Wavelength: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm, 670nm,
700nm
Measurement period: 12 seconds
Measurement range: -0.1-5.0 Abs; linear range: 0-5 O.D.
Lamp: tungsten-halogen; 12V, 50VA

Repeatability: CV, no greater than 1%


Stability: Absorbance change no greater than 0.01 in 1h

A.2 Power Requirements


Power supply: AC 100-130V/200-240V, 50/60Hz, three-wire power cord and
properly grounded
Input power: 1000VA

A.3 Environmental Requirements

A.3.1 Storage Requirements


Temperature: 0ºC -40ºC
Humidity: 30% - 80%, no condensation
Atmospheric pressure: 500 hPa - 1,060 hPa
Above-sea-level height: -1,300feet-18,000 feet
-400m-5,500 m

A.3.2 Operation Requirements


Temperature: 15ºC - 30ºC
Humidity: 35% - 80%, no condensation
Atmospheric pressure: 860 hPa - 1,060 hPa
Above-sea-level height: -1,300feet- 6,500 feet
-400m-2,000 m

A.4 Dimension and Weight


Dimension: 980mm×710mm×1200mm (W×D×H)
Weight: 175kg

A-2
Specifications

A.5 Other Specifications


Sound data: 68dB
Fuse: 250VAC T1.6A
250VAC T2A
250VAC T6.3A
250VAC T10A

A.6 Input/Output Devices


PC Keyboard
PC Mouse
Printer
Display

A.7 Interface
LIS interface: Mindray HL7 interface
Interface between Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit: RS-232

A-3
Appendix B Supplies
To ensure personal safety and system performance, use only supplies manufactured
or recommended by Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.. Contact
the Mindray Service Department or your local distributor for details.

Replacing Parts and Consumables

Description Part Number Location Remarks


50W tungsten-halogen BA30-10-06365 Lamp box Replacing part
lamp L9389 ’Gilway’ (Light
Replace it when
source lamp)
1) It serves for
over 1000h; or
2) The system
prompts.
PLUNGER ASSEMBLY 0040-10-32315 Sample Replacing part
24399 50µL PG 'KLOEHN’ syringe
(Plunger assembly of 50µl Replace it when
syringe) 1) It serves for 3
months;
2) It runs for
100,000 times; or
3) It is seriously
damaged.
PLUNGER ASSEMBLY 0040-10-32317 Reagent Replacing part
24400 500µL PG syringe
'KLOEHN’ (Plunger Replace it when
assembly of 500µl 1) It serves for 3
syringe) months;
2) It runs for
100,000 times; or
3) It is seriously
damaged.
Sample syringe gasket 0040-10-32303 Connection Replacing part
part
between the Replace it when
sample the sample
syringe and syringe is
the T-piece disassembled for
2 - 3 times.
Reagent syringe gasket 0040-10-32303 Connection Replacing part
part
between the Replace it when
reagent the reagent
syringe and syringe is
the T-piece disassembled for
2 - 3 times.

B-1
Supplies

Description Part Number Location Remarks


Reagent probe assembly BA30-30-06753 Reagent Replacing part
probe arm
Replace it when
1) It serves for 1
year; or
2) It is damaged
or bent.
Sample probe assembly BA30-30-14978 Sample Replacing part
probe arm
Replace it when
1) It serves for 1
year; or
2) It is damaged
or bent.
Sample probe gasket 0040-10-32307 Nut on the Replacing part
sample
probe Replace it when
1) The sample
probe is
disassembled for
2 - 3 times; or
2) The sample
probe is replaced
with a new one.
Reagent probe gasket 0040-10-32307 Nut on the Replacing part
reagent
probe Replace it when
1) The reagent
probe is
disassembled for
2 - 3 times; or
2) The reagent
probe is replaced
with a new one.
Mixing bar BA30-20-06775 Mixing bar Replacing part
arm
Replace it when
it is damaged.
A4 copy paper 0150-10-00381 Printer Consumable
Reaction cuvette BA30-20-15179 Reaction Consumable
disk
Mindray inner-circle bottle BA30-20-15058 Reagent Consumable
disk
Mindray outer-circle bottle BA30-20-15059 Reagent Consumable
disk

B-2
Appendix C Index

4-74, 4-75, 4-76, 4-77, 4-78,


A 4-79, 4-81, 4-93

absorbance ...... 1-13, 1-14, 3-4, 4-3, carryover ............................... 8, 3-5


4-43, 4-44, 4-45, 4-46, 4-47,
4-48 check box 1-17, 3-6, 4-3, 4-4, 4-13,
4-45, 4-53, 4-95, 4-96, 4-97,
acid .............................5, 4-40, 4-41 4-136, 4-138, 4-139, 4-170,
4-171
administrator...................3-4, 4-142
Circle
administrator authority .......... 4-142
inner .......................................... 1-4
alarm................... 1-11, 1-16, 4-136
outer .......................................... 1-4
alkaline ................................ 5, 4-41
clinical...........................................1
analyzing unit . 7, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4,
1-5, 1-6, 1-7, 1-8, 1-10, 1-11, Combo box.............................. 1-17
1-12, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-8, 4-41
Communication......................... 1-4
ANALYZING UNIT POWER.. 3-3,
3-8, 4-41
control ... 7, 1-4, 3-3, 3-4, 4-9, 4-12,
4-34, 4-40, 4-41, 4-87, 4-88,
Assembly 4-89, 4-90, 4-91, 4-92, 4-93,
4-94, 4-96, 4-97, 4-101, 4-104,
reagent disk................................ 1-7 4-107

B control system 7, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-40

backgrounds............................... 3-4 cuvette loader ................... 1-2, 1-10

bottle used by reagent 1 ........... 4-66 D

bottle used by reagent 2 ........... 4-66 dark currents.............................. 3-4

C Data ..... 9, 1-15, 3-6, 3-7, 4-1, 4-14,


4-16, 4-20, 4-23, 4-28, 4-32,
4-34, 4-83, 4-120
calculation factor ..................... 4-48
decimal.................................... 4-44
calibration .................................. 3-5
Deionized Water........................ 1-3
calibration curve ... 4-33, 4-79, 4-84
deionized water tank ................. 3-3
calibration parameter .......4-7, 4-49,
4-50, 4-70, 4-78, 4-80
department name ........ 4-143, 4-144
calibration result ... 4-33, 4-83, 4-84
Detector
Calibrator1-4, 4-8, 4-11, 4-12, 4-31,
4-46, 4-47, 4-71, 4-72, 4-73, deionized water level ................ 1-3

C-1
Index

waste level ................................. 1-4 Humidity ................................... 2-3

dialog box ..... 1-16, 3-4, 4-12, 4-13, hydrochloric ............................ 4-40
4-21, 4-22, 4-27, 4-29, 4-40,
4-41, 4-42, 4-49, 4-50, 4-53,
4-63, 4-70, 4-74, 4-83, 4-87, I
4-91, 4-118, 4-135, 4-136, 4-137,
4-139, 4-142, 4-170, 4-171, Incubation ........................ 3-4, 4-45
4-173
inner circle ....................... 1-4, 4-65
Diluents ..................................... 1-4

dilution ratio ......... 4-3, 4-13, 4-139
Kinetic. 4-8, 4-43, 4-44, 4-45, 4-47,
Door
4-48, 4-138
middle........................................ 1-5

double-reagent .. 1-10, 4-2, 4-7, 4-8,
4-9, 4-43, 4-45, 4-47, 4-48, 4-65 lamp .......................................... 3-5

linearity .......................... 4-44, 4-48



lower door ............................... 1-10
edit box 1-18, 4-2, 4-44, 4-45, 4-47,
4-48, 4-72, 4-73, 4-77, 4-79,
lower limit.............4-51, 4-52, 4-52
4-80, 4-89, 4-90, 4-93, 4-97,
4-98, 4-136, 4-139, 4-140, 4-143,
4-144, 4-146, 4-173 M
Endpoint4-8, 4-43, 4-45, 4-46, 4-47, MAIN POWER .............................7
4-139
maintenance ..................................7
Environment .............................. 2-2
menu............................. 2, 1-15, 4-1
Equipment
middle door ...............1-5, 1-8, 1-12
water purifying .......................... 2-3
mixer ................................ 1-9, 1-10

mixing bar 4, 7, 1-9, 1-10, 3-2, 3-4,
Finished ..3-6, 3-7, 4-12, 4-13, 4-15 4-41, 4-136

first reagent.....................4-47, 4-69 O


Fixed Time............................. 4-138 operation unit ........7, 1-1, 1-4, 1-14

H optical path............1-12, 1-14, 4-48

handle ..................... 5, 1-4, 1-5, 1-7 option button ................ 1-17, 4-138

Handwheel.................. 1-4, 1-5, 1-7 outer circle ....................... 1-4, 4-65

Help ..................................1-15, 4-1 output unit ........................ 1-1, 1-14

horizontal position ..............1-5, 1-7

hospital name......................... 4-143

C-2
Index

P reaction curve.......4-13, 4-14, 4-15,


4-16, 4-22, 4-23, 4-27, 4-28,
Parameters1-15, 3-5, 4-1, 4-8, 4-41, 4-31, 4-34, 4-120
4-42, 4-43, 4-63, 4-70, 4-94,
4-95, 4-96, 4-97 reaction cuvette .. 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 1-8,
1-9, 1-10, 1-12, 1-13, 1-14, 4-15
password3-4, 4-29, 4-42, 4-63, 4-70,
4-87, 4-135, 4-142 reaction disk ... 1-6, 1-9, 1-10, 1-12,
1-13, 3-4, 4-15
patient report...... 4-23, 4-29, 4-169,
4-170 reaction disk diagram .............. 4-15

photometric system...........1-13, 3-4 reagent blank .................. 4-11, 4-48

Position reagent bottle1-7, 1-8, 1-9, 3-5, 3-8,


4-67, 4-69
tube ............................................ 1-4
reagent disk .... 7, 1-7, 1-8, 3-5, 3-8,
position for reagent 1............... 4-65 4-64, 4-65, 4-66

position for reagent 2............... 4-65 reagent dispenser....................... 1-8

Power..................................3-3, 3-8 reagent syringe ............1-5, 1-8, 3-2

cord.................................... 2-2, A-2 Refrigerator ............................... 1-7

socket......................................... 2-2 relative humidity ....................... 2-3

power socket.......................2-2, 3-2 report header ......................... 4-169

power supply .............. 1-7, 2-2, 3-2 Requested,.......................... 3-6, 3-7

primary wavelength ................. 4-44 re-runs ................................... 4-135

printing order ..............4-169, 4-172 response..... 4-47, 4-48, 4-79, 4-138

probe arm............................1-5, 1-8 response range....................... 4-138

probe rotor ..........................1-5, 1-8 Routine...... 1-15, 4-1, 4-7, 4-8, 4-9,
4-10, 4-40, 4-135, 4-136
probe tip..................................... 3-2
Running........... 3-6, 3-7, 4-17, 4-21
profile ........................................ 4-4


Sample
QC parameter....... 4-49, 4-50, 4-87,
4-98, 4-99 disk............................................ 1-4

QC rules................................... 4-94 dispenser ................................... 1-5

QC test..........................4-87, 4-136 probe .................................. 1-4, 1-5

probe arm .................................. 1-5



probe rotor................................. 1-5
R1 blank .................................. 4-47
sample cup ................................ 1-4

C-3
Index

sample disk . 7, 8, 1-4, 1-5, 1-8, 3-5, temperature1-7, 1-12, 1-16, 2-1, 2-2,
3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 4-3, 4-8, 4-9, 4-11, 2-3, 3-4
4-12, 4-13, 4-71, 4-88, 4-121
test report ................... 4-169, 4-171
sample disk diagram ................ 4-11
Tube .......................................... 1-4
sample dispenser........................ 1-5

sample probe.. 4, 7, 8, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, U


1-8, 3-2, 3-4, 4-41, 4-136
Unit .... 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-9, 1-11, 3-2,
sample syringe ........................... 1-5 3-3, 3-8, 4-43, 4-48, 4-140,
4-141
sample tube................. 1-4, 1-5, 1-6
Analyzing.................................. 1-1
sample volume........8, 9, 4-13, 4-44
Operation................................... 1-1
scroll bar .................................. 1-18
Output ....................................... 1-1
second reagent ................1-10, 4-45
upper limit.. 4-51, 4-52, 4-52, 4-79,
secondary wavelength.............. 4-44 4-138

serum ............................................ 8 urine ..............................................8

short-cut button.. 4-1, 4-7, 4-8, 4-40 used-cuvettes bucket ................. 3-3

username ................................... 3-4


single-reagent ...... 1-10, 4-43, 4-45,
4-47, 4-65, 4-66

surplus antigen..... 4-45, 4-46, 4-47,
4-138 vertical position...........1-4, 1-5, 1-7

surplus substrate ...................... 4-47 volume (180~450 μl) of the first


reagent................................. 4-44
Syringe
volume (30~450 μl) of the second
reagent ....................................... 1-5
reagen.................................. 4-44
sample........................................ 1-5

System .. 1, 2, 1-1, 1-13, 1-15, 1-16,
3-3, 3-8, 4-1, 4-135, 4-142, Waiting ............................... 3-6, 3-7
4-168
wash well ..................1-6, 1-9, 1-10

Waste......................................... 1-4
tab ......1-16, 4-11, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16,
4-17, 4-18, 4-20, 4-21, 4-23, waste tank....................3-3, 3-4, 3-8
4-26, 4-28, 4-30, 4-32, 4-33,
4-34, 4-43, 4-48, 4-49, 4-50, Weight ....................................... 2-1
4-51, 4-64, 4-65, 4-68, 4-71,
4-78, 4-87, 4-88, 4-94, 4-97, Worklist Status .....4-10, 4-14, 4-17,
4-98, 4-120, 4-135, 4-136, 4-137, 4-20, 4-26
4-138, 4-139, 4-140, 4-141,
4-143, 4-145, 4-147, 4-169,
4-170, 4-172, 4-173

C-4
P/N: BA33-20-35244 (1.3)

You might also like